WO2011035705A1 - Number-order-code-element keyboard and information input method thereof - Google Patents

Number-order-code-element keyboard and information input method thereof Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2011035705A1
WO2011035705A1 PCT/CN2010/077121 CN2010077121W WO2011035705A1 WO 2011035705 A1 WO2011035705 A1 WO 2011035705A1 CN 2010077121 W CN2010077121 W CN 2010077121W WO 2011035705 A1 WO2011035705 A1 WO 2011035705A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
input
sequence
character
code
word
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2010/077121
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
梁晨
Original Assignee
Liang Chen
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Liang Chen filed Critical Liang Chen
Priority to CN201080020843.8A priority Critical patent/CN102511021B/en
Publication of WO2011035705A1 publication Critical patent/WO2011035705A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/02Input arrangements using manually operated switches, e.g. using keyboards or dials
    • G06F3/0202Constructional details or processes of manufacture of the input device
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/018Input/output arrangements for oriental characters

Definitions

  • the invention relates to a digital sequence symbol keyboard for converting a scattered information item into a code form and an information input method thereof, and belongs to the technical field of Chinese information processing, in particular to the technical field of Chinese character code input processing of an alphabet keyboard.
  • Prior Art 3 Although a lot of digital is used, they are all sorting symbols, and the screen prompts can be used to select input, which is difficult to remember and is not convenient for blind typing. Because the re-coding rate is too high, it is not recognized by the academic community, but most users can accept it. The main reason for the defect is that there is no coding correspondence between the digital and the digital sequence re-code, and the digital-sequence code is not distinguished from each other by the coding information.
  • the Chinese character encoding input method has three kinds of sound code, shape code and sound shape code.
  • the digital generally does not participate in the encoding. After the maximum input code length or the input end mark is reached, if the weight code appears, the number is used as the sort symbol, and the input and the weight code are selected.
  • the coded Chinese character encoding input method mainly includes three kinds of full spelling, simple spelling and double spelling.
  • the same code has many heavy codes, and common words cannot be blindly hit, which is a problem that has not been solved.
  • 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 are used to input the Yinping, Yangping, Shangsheng, Deaf and soft tones, while the practical frequency of the tones is descending, but the sound is flat, flat, flat, and soft, almost the opposite.
  • the homophones in the descending order of the practical frequency are also sequentially displayed in the digital order, and the order of the input efficiency from the left hand to the finger is also reversed, which is unreasonable.
  • the layout of the vowels of the conventional alphabet keyboard is very different, and it is necessary to learn separately. And memory. Therefore, whether the specified two vowels can be combined, especially whether the initial vowels with the same initials and single vowels can be merged is the key to whether the alphabetic keyboard and its virtual keyboard can be consistent.
  • the layout of the English letters VIII, E, I and U causes the vowel to be "the same mother, the same vowel", and the vowels with the same initials and vowels of u and U cannot be merged, so the layout of the letters needs to be redesigned, especially Is the layout of the letters A, E, I and U.
  • the shape code In the existing shape code input method, it is necessary to frequently switch the input mode to input English and Chinese characters; and the word code of the shape code is only a limited number of word codes for filling the gap, once the sound code solves the problem of single-word blind typing input, the shape code also There is no advantage.
  • the natural code is the most representative, mainly based on double spelling, supplemented by shape code, which does not get rid of the above defects of the sound code, and does not give full play to the technical advantages of the shape code, the durability of the user application. It is also not as good as the "five-stroke type" equivalent code input method.
  • the Chinese syllable is the most natural, direct and effective simplified form of Chinese characters. It is a written language of spoken Chinese and is a natural compression and simplification of written Chinese characters. Chinese written words are only the supplement and development of Chinese spoken language. They have never replaced Chinese spoken language. Therefore, Chinese syllables are the basic information of Chinese characters, while Chinese phonetic symbols are the decomposition of Chinese syllables. Not fully utilizing Chinese phonetic symbols and digital, especially without using digital input short codes, is the fundamental reason why the problem of Chinese character encoding and input has not been completely solved so far. Technical solution
  • the main object of the present invention is to overcome the deficiencies of the prior art, and to improve the number-sequence code input method of the character code-added serial number to the number-sequence code input method of the character code-added number-sequence symbol, and specify and prompt in the digital line. Moreover, you can directly input more short codes and completely solve the problem that the short code is rare and you need to add spaces to input.
  • a further object of the present invention is to make full use of the row-column correspondence of characters or symbols, and the difference in efficiency of fingerstrokes, to design a more regular character or symbol layout, so as to more succinctly merge each column of characters.
  • the roots, strokes, and other symbols specified by the key, and the finals specified by each column and each character key make the layout of characters or symbols more reasonable and easier to remember.
  • the main object of the present invention is achieved based on the principle that according to the oblique or positive fingering of the keyboard fingerstroke, the character or symbol specified by each column of character keys is also assigned to the digital key of the same fingerstroke key.
  • the character or symbol specified by each digital key is called a digital symbol, and is sequentially arranged in a numerical order to form a sequence of symbols; and/or according to the digital input efficiency and the practical frequency of the digital dedicated symbol, in the digital line
  • a digital sequential symbol keyboard and an information input method thereof wherein the target character is a syllable syllable symbol, a single word, a word, a phrase or a sentence of a Chinese character, or any combination of a Chinese character and various characters;
  • the coding information unit used is called a symbol, and is designated as a symbol layout on the character key of any alphabet keyboard or virtual alphabet keyboard, and the character name marked by the character key participating in the encoding
  • the keys of all coded characters constitute the character keypad;
  • the encoding input process of specific Chinese words or their pronunciation syllables is composed of multiple processes in the same or different input modes, and each process includes the following steps:
  • the character or symbol specified by each column of character keys is also specified on the digital key of the same fingerstroke key; the character or symbol specified by each digit key
  • the digital symbol is sequentially arranged in a numerical order to form a sequence of symbols; and/or the digital dedicated digital sequence symbol is directly specified in the digital line according to the digital input efficiency and the practical frequency of the digital dedicated symbol;
  • a subset of the sequence of symbols also referred to as a sequence of symbols;
  • the keyboard specifying at least one number of symbols is referred to as a numbered symbol keyboard, including The numbered symbol keyboard of the two fingerings of the oblique column and the positive column; thus, after inputting the first coded character, the coded character that makes the digital non-first key and only valid at the end of the code represents the order of the numbered symbols.
  • Participate in the code in turn, specify the short code as the additional code of the previously input code; input one code character in the character keypad, input the character code, add the sequence code symbol to be input, and form the character code additional sequence code symbol Number Coding, corresponding to the sequence of the target character set, select one or more groups with higher practical frequency, up to 12 number of target characters per group, specify one or more groups of the input character codes in the digital line
  • Each group of up to 12 short codes arranged in numerical order, called a sequence short code the process is called specifying a sequence short code according to the input code additional number sequence symbol; using the following character encoding additional number order Number sequence short code input method of symbol:
  • the first character code input is added to the number sequence symbol to be input, and the number sequence code of the first character code additional sequence code symbol is formed, and the corresponding number order target character set is selected, and the utility is selected.
  • One or more groups of higher frequency, each group of up to 12 number of sequence target characters, one or more sets of sequence short codes specified in the digital line and prompting the first character, called first-order digital short code, under The second keystroke uses any number of digits to be input, directly enters its short code to end the process, otherwise enters the next coded character;
  • the input two-character code is added to the number sequence symbol to be input, and the number sequence code of the two-character coded additional number sequence symbol is formed, and the corresponding digital sequence target character set is selected.
  • One or more groups of higher frequency of practicality, up to 12 number of sequence target characters per group, one or more sets of sequence short codes specified in the digital line and prompting two-character encoding, called second order short code The next keystroke uses any number of digits to be input, directly enters its shortcode and ends the process, otherwise enters the next encoded character;
  • N is a positive integer that is incremented one by one, and the input N words
  • the code of the character is added to the sequence code symbol to be input, and the number sequence code of the N character code additional sequence code symbol is composed, and the corresponding number of sequence target character sets are selected, and one or more groups with a higher practical frequency are selected.
  • N-order number sequence short codes A group of up to 12 number of sequence target characters, one or more sets of sequence short codes specified in the digital line and prompted by N characters, called N-order number sequence short codes, and the next keystrokes to use the number sequence symbols to be input Any of the numbers, directly enter the short code to end the process, otherwise enter the next coded character; until the maximum input code length is reached, or enter non-coded characters such as punctuation, spaces, or carriage return to end the process;
  • the input character code cannot add the weight code of the sequence code symbol, and the weight code of the descending order of the practical frequency is sequentially designated according to the descending order of the finger of the previous keystroke and the finger to be input digital and the combination keystroke efficiency.
  • any one of the shape code Chinese character encoding input methods is used, which is characterized in that the number sequence short code is specified according to the input code added sequence number symbol. Simplified to select a short code in the existing short code of the higher level of each column to be input characters, and form the sequence short code of the level in numerical order, as follows:
  • one of the two-level short codes of each character to be input is selected, and the short code of each of the same fingerstroke numbers is designated, and the first-order digital short code is composed in numerical order;
  • N is a positive integer incrementing one by one, and selecting one of the N+1 level short codes of each character to be input, designating each short code of the same fingerstroke key, by number
  • the sequence forms an N-order number shortcode until the set maximum input code length is reached.
  • the 10-column character keys on the left side are divided into the left and right areas of the number of columns, and in each area, the first stroke of the root is the same as the character of the same column, and the root of the character is specified.
  • the same root symbol of the second stroke, specified on the character key of the same line, is called the column stroke root symbol layout, including the column stroke root symbol layout of the oblique column and the positive column fingering; the root of the same column character key
  • the symbol element is also specified on the digital key of the same fingerstroke key, and constitutes the number sequence root symbol of the oblique column or the positive column fingering, or is further reduced to the number sequence stroke symbol composed of the first stroke and the second stroke of the radical;
  • the original "five-stroke type" original simplified or traditional word encoding input method is retained, and spaces can also be added. Input the original short code, if using the positive index fingering, you can further add the number 1 and input the original short
  • each time a coded character is input the input character code is added, the number of the sequence word root symbol to be input, or the number of sequenced stroke symbols is added, and the corresponding number of target target Chinese characters is selected, or a group with a higher practical frequency is selected.
  • Group, up to 12 target Chinese characters in each group specify one or more sets of numbered short code words encoded in 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 characters in the digital line; use the number to be entered in the next keystroke Any digit of the radical root symbol or the digital sequential stroke symbol, directly inputting its short codeword to end the process; otherwise, input the next encoded character; until the maximum input code length is reached, or input non-coding such as punctuation, space, etc. End the process with a character or a carriage return.
  • any Chinese character code input method using full spelling, simple spelling or double spelling is used, and the characteristics are as follows:
  • the tone symbols of the sound, the Yinping, the Yangping and the upper sound are respectively designated on the left, right and right hand digital keys of the index finger, the middle finger, the ring finger and the little finger; or further all the tones are combined into zero tones, respectively Specified on two digital keys with high input efficiency, left-hand and right-hand; two double tones that specify zero tonality or not, collectively referred to as digital-sequence dual-tone; according to the pronunciation of Chinese words, any one of the following character codes is used.
  • the method of inputting the sequence number short code of the additional number sequence symbol After inputting any sound medium coding, the number sequence tones to be input are added, and the sound sequence of the sequence is composed, and the corresponding numerical order target Chinese characters are selected.
  • Syllable short code word the next keystroke uses any number of single-order single tone, directly input its syllable short code word, or use any other digital, input the syllabic short code word prompted, thus ending the process, called Acoustic prime code encoding additional sequence-single-tone digital sequence short code word input mode;
  • the sequenced double tones to be input are added to form two sets of sequenced audio tones; a set of sequenced tones specifies and prompts the sequenced syllables, and the other
  • the group number tone specifies and prompts the syllable symbol of the sequence; the next keystroke uses any number of the sequenced double tone, directly inputs its syllable short code word or syllable symbol to end the process; or further prompts the input syllable symbol
  • the process ends, and the number encoding short code input method of the character encoding additional number sequential symbol is used, which is collectively referred to as the numerical code short-order short-coded short-coded short-word input method;
  • the input double-syllables are regarded as two-syllable words, and whether or not they are re-coded, each double-syllable word and its first and last words form a sequence of word words;
  • the process ends, and the character encoding short-coded short code input method of the character encoding additional number-sequence symbol up to this point is collectively referred to as the character-coded short-coded short word input of the character encoding additional sequenced tone. method.
  • the digital sequence symbol keyboard and the information input method thereof according to the technical solution 1, characterized in that, according to the digital input efficiency and the single-female practical frequency, the digital sequence line directly specifies the sequenced single final, or further in the reference.
  • the key line or the line above the same finger key character also specifies a single final is called a character single final; or further specifies the numerical order single tone or double tone to form a sequence rhyme; Any number of character encoding additional sequence number symbols of the number order short code input method:
  • the first key input enters the first word single initial, 2 11 and 2 , sh and s, ch and c respectively, or separately specify the double initial key and the first key input, otherwise the key input twice input the first double initial;
  • the input of the single initial or double initial, the additional sequenced single vowel to be input constitutes the first order of the sequence of rhymes, each of the rhymes and their rhymes contain all the sounds of i, u and U, corresponding to In the numerical order target Chinese character, select one or more groups, each group of up to 12 single words or single words with higher practical frequency, specify and prompt one or more sets of sequenced sound rhyming code words in the digital line.
  • the next keystroke uses any number of the single-sequence single-final, directly inputting its vocoded short-coded word and ends the process, which is called the initial-coded short-coded single-final single-coded short codeword input mode;
  • the first word mother is further input, so that the first word initial is input by a maximum of three keystrokes; the numbered single vowel to be input is added, and the number sequence sound of the first word is composed, and the corresponding numerical order target Chinese character is Select one or more groups, each group of up to 12 single words or single words with higher practical frequency, specify and prompt one or more sets of sequenced sounds in the digital line, the next hit
  • the key uses any number of single vowels and directly inputs its vocal code to end the process, which is called the sound-coded mother-coded sequence-single-single-single-single-simplified code-word input mode;
  • any character of the single vowel of the character inputting the phonological rhyme of the first word; using the vocal grammar coding to add a sequence of single-tone single-coded short code word input mode, directly input any syllable short code Terminating the process by using the word; or using the augmented rhyme coding additional number-sequence double-tone sequence-sequential short code word input mode, directly inputting any syllable short code word or syllable symbol to end the process; or further inputting Enter any homophone of the syllable symbol and end the process;
  • the process ends, and the number encoding short code input method of the character encoding additional number sequential symbol is used, which is collectively referred to as the initial sequence of the initials. method; Or further, input a single word initial or double initial, the input sound and the initial code, add the sequenced single vowel to be input, form the sequence of the sound and rhyme, each sound and rhyme, And its rhyme contains all the sounds and sounds of 1, u and U, corresponding to the number of target two-syllable words, select one or more groups, each group of up to 12 pairs with higher practical frequency
  • the syllables are specified in the digital line and suggest one or more sets of sequenced sounds and vowels. The next time you use the key of the second vowel, you can directly enter the short code. Ending the process with a syllable, called the phonological and initial consonant coded sequenced single vowel, the numbered short code word input mode;
  • the process ends, and the number encoding short code input method of the character encoding additional number sequential symbol is used, which is collectively referred to as the initial coded short code word of the initials. Word input method.
  • the digital sequence symbol keyboard and the information input method thereof according to the technical scheme 1 are characterized in that V is used instead of "hu", and the double initial combination input; according to the digital input efficiency and the single vowel practical frequency, in the digital
  • the line directly specifies the sequence single vowel, or further specifies the single vowel as the character single vowel on the same keystroke line or the same finger line character key; or further specifies the number order single tone or double tone
  • the composition of the sequence rhyme adjustment using any of the following character encoding additional numerical sequence code number short code input method:
  • the first keystroke enters the first word single initial, and the numbered single vowel to be input is added to form the first-order numerical sequence rhyme.
  • Each sound and its rhyme contains all the sounds of i, u, U, h and hu or v.
  • one or more groups each group of up to 12 single words or single words with higher practical frequency, are specified in the digital line and suggest one or more groups, numerical order Acoustic rhyme short code word, the next keystroke uses any number of the single-sequence single-final, directly input its rhyme short-character word and end the process, called the mono-acoustic coding additional number-single-single-single-sequence short-coded word input mode;
  • the first word single mediator is further input, so that the voice initials of the first word are input twice at most; the numbered single vowels to be input are added, and the number sequence sound of the first word is composed, and the corresponding numerical order target
  • select one or more groups each group of up to 12 single words or single words with higher practical frequency, and specify and prompt one or more sets of sequenced sound simplification code words in the digital line.
  • the next keystroke uses any number of single vowels, directly inputting its syllabic short codeword and ending the process, which is called the monophonic coded additional sequenced single vowel.
  • any character of the single vowel of the character inputting the phonological rhyme of the first word; using the vocal grammar coding to add the number-single-single-single-sequential short code word input mode, directly inputting any syllable short code Terminating the process by using the word; or using the augmented rhyme coding additional number-sequence double-tone sequence-sequential short code word input mode, directly inputting any syllable short code word or syllable symbol to end the process; or further inputting Enter any homophone of the syllable symbol and end the process;
  • the sub-word initials, the input sound and the initial code add the sequence-single vowel to be input, form the sequence of the sound and rhyme, each sound and rhyme, and its rhyme Including all the sounds and sounds of ⁇ u, U, h and hu or v, corresponding to the sequenced target two-syllable words, one or more groups are selected, and each group has a maximum of 12 practical frequencies.
  • Two-syllable words specified in the digital line and prompting one or more sets of, the sequence of the sound and the rhyme short coded two-syllable words, the next keystroke Using any digit of the second-character single-final, directly inputting its short-coded double-syllables and ending the process, which is called the monophonic mero-symbol and the mono-acoustic encoding, the number-sequence-single-single-single-single-simplified-word input mode;
  • the process ends, and the number encoding method of the character encoding additional number sequential symbols of the character encoding so far is collectively referred to as the order of the number of the monosyllabic coded sequence Shortcode word input method.
  • the single initial is assigned to the alphabetic key of the same glyph, and the feature is that, in principle, the same final vowel of the mediator is specified in the same line of character keys.
  • the single vowels of the same single vowel are assigned to the same column of character keys, and the individual vowels can be exceptional; the mesons of the vowels alone, i, u and U are collectively referred to as zero vowels, which are respectively assigned to the same character keys of the single final er ; 2 ⁇ !
  • the numeric key of the key constitutes a sequence single vowel, or further specifies the numerical order single tone or double tone to form a numerical sequence vowel; the sequence of the additional numbered symbols is encoded by any of the following characters Shortcode input method:
  • the first keystroke inputs the single or double initials of the first word, and uses the initial code of the initial coded single-final single-coded short code word input mode, and directly inputs any of the abbreviated short code words to end the process;
  • the phonological coding code is a sequence-simplified syllabic input mode that adds a sequence of two-tones, directly inputting any syllable short code word or syllable symbol to end the process; or further inputting any homophone of the input syllable symbol and ending The process;
  • the process ends, and the character encoding additional number sequence code input method of the character code added thereto is collectively referred to as a double-splicing code-added number-sequence-to-speech code sequence-simplified code word Input method
  • a single keystroke enters the prime vowel of the second word, and uses the double-tone vocoding to encode the numbered short code word input mode of the additional number, and inputs any short coded double word, or any of its words. End the process;
  • the input 1st, 2nd coded characters, and/or the 3rd and 4th coded characters are not valid sounds, they are regarded as multi-syllables, and the initials of each word are used in turn or Adding the final vowel coding input of the last word;
  • the process ends, and the character encoding additional number sequence code input method of the character code added to the end of the process is collectively referred to as the double-splicing code-added number-sequence-to-speech number-order short code word. Word input method.
  • the digital sequence symbol keyboard and the information input method thereof characterized in that the final vowel is specified on the "QWERTY" keyboard, and the upper line of the reference key is: a, ang, e, er, an , en, eng, au, eu, ei, ai; the reference key one line is: ia, iang, ie, i, ian, ien, ieng, iau, ieu, and the uei, uai; The lines are: ua, uang, ue (ue), u, uan (iian), uen (uen), ueng (iieng), the symbols in parentheses can be omitted; zh and z, 811 and 3, ch and c are respectively combined, Or the double initials Zh, Sh, and Ch are respectively designated on the character keys other than the single initial, or sequentially designated on the ", ", ".”, and "/
  • AMF "AWF" keyboard; and Chinese tone symbols e and eng, ie and ieng, ue (ue) and ueng (ueng) respectively exchange keys, or replace Chinese phonetic symbols with Chinese pinyin or phonetic symbols.
  • the number of keystrokes is increased by about 10 times, and the number of first-order digital short codes is close to 300, which is enough to cover the most commonly used single words or single words;
  • the number of short codes is more than 7000, which is enough to cover 3000 commonly used words or single words.
  • the sequence short code is the expansion of character encoding and does not occupy its coding resources. Almost all the numbers are fully utilized and can be completely solved. Space or number 1 can input the problem of few short codes.
  • the input efficiency of commonly used Chinese characters is greatly improved, and the numbered symbols of the same code are distinguished from each other by numbers, which is more convenient for memory and blind typing.
  • the technical solution 2 has the beneficial effects of selecting a sequence short code in a high level one existing short code of each column to be input characters, and reducing up to 3 short codes of a high level to a simple code of the level, simply It intuitively reveals the essential difference between the technology and the sequence short code, which makes it easier to understand and implement the sequence short code.
  • the technical solution 3 has the beneficial effect that the first symbol of the root symbol of the same column of character keys is the same, and the radical symbol specified by the character key of the same type of the keystroke can be merged into the first stroke of the radical, and the root of the numerical sequence or Stroke symbols are simpler and more intuitive.
  • the beneficial effect of the technical solution 4 is that the acoustic syllabic code is added with a sequence-single-tone single-sequence short code word input mode, which can input the most commonly used words of each syllable more efficiently; Double-tone digital sequence short code input mode, you can also input any syllable symbol or its homonym; double-syllable coded additional sequence number-simplified code word input mode, you can input double-syllable words or any single word, There is no need to memorize the single-word prompt number, which is another option for blind typing of a single word.
  • the beneficial effects of the technical solution 5 are: No matter whether the whole spelling, the simple spelling or the double spelling, the initials are added with the numbered single vowels, the direct input of more than 200 sound and rhyme short code words, the input efficiency is greatly improved, and the simple code learning and The difficulty of memory is greatly reduced. Since the digital line specifies a single-sequence single-final without the use of coded character input, you can enter any of the sounds by typing up to four times.
  • the beneficial effect of the technical solution 7 is that: the maximum number of keystrokes is input twice, and the method of inputting the number-sequential short-sounding code of the double-sequence coding is used as the optimal word coding input method; The method of inputting the number-simplified code words of the double-splicing code-added number-sequence-tone is the best word-encoding input method, which can completely solve the problem of Chinese character coding input.
  • Figure 1 is a comparison table of the monophonic, double, single and intermediate symbols of Chinese, Chinese, and phonetic symbols
  • Figure 2 is the mother of Chinese, Pinyin and phonetic symbols, single vowel and mediation.
  • the symbolic comparison table of the finals
  • Fig. 3 is a layout example of the initials and the primes and the primes of the "QWERTY" keyboard oblique indexing, and the layout of the strokes and the roots of the strokes and their numbers and strokes Layout embodiment
  • FIG. 4 is a corresponding embodiment of the positive indexing of FIG. 3;
  • FIG. 5 is a layout embodiment of the initial and initial vowels of the "AWF" keyboard oblique index fingering, and the column stroke root Another embodiment of the symbol layout and the root and stroke layout of the sequence;
  • Figure 6 is a corresponding embodiment of the positive fingering of Figure 5;
  • Figure 7 is the initial and initial reference of the "XIY" keyboard oblique fingering of the newly designed keyboard.
  • FIG. 8 is a corresponding embodiment of the positive indexing of FIG. 7;
  • FIG. 9 is a layout example of the initial and final vowels of the newly designed "HIY" keyboard oblique index fingering
  • FIG. 10 is a corresponding embodiment of the positive fingering of FIG. 9;
  • FIGS. 11, 13, 15, 17, and 19 are both oblique fingering, and FIGS. 12, 14, 16, 18, and 20 are positive indexing;
  • FIG. 11 is The character layout of the "QWERTY” keyboard
  • Figure 12 is the character layout of the "AWF” keyboard
  • Figure 13 is the initial layout of the pinyin or vowel symbol of the "QWERTY” keyboard
  • Figure 14 is the pinyin or sound of the "AWF” keyboard.
  • Figure 15 is the pinyin layout of the "QWERTY” keyboard
  • Figure 16 is the layout of the prime symbol of the "AWF” keyboard
  • Figure 17 is the pinyin or sound of the "XIY” keyboard.
  • Figure 18 is the initial layout of the phonetic symbol of the "AWF” keyboard
  • Figure 19 is the initial layout of the pinyin or initial symbol of the "HIY” keyboard
  • Figure 20 is the phonetic symbol of the "AWF” keyboard.
  • the vowel layout; in Figures 15, 16 and 20, the "+” after the mediator represents the single vowel of the same column on the top of the reference key. If a special double-byte vowel symbol is used, the effect is better.
  • Figure 21 is an example of a sequence-single-single vowel with a positive-altitude fingering of the initials, and a sequence-sounding vocoded word that is specified and prompted;
  • Figure 22 is a sequence-single-tone and other digital, numerical order An embodiment of a syllable short code word; Fig.
  • FIG. 23 is a corresponding embodiment of the positive column fingering; the syllabic symbols are in parentheses, and the simple frequency single word practical frequency data is in square brackets;
  • Figure 24-27 is a sequence double For the embodiment of the tone, Figures 24 and 26 are both oblique fingering, and Figures 25 and 27 are both positive fingering;
  • Figures 28 and 29 are the syllabic symbols and syllables of the sequenced two-tones of the positive fingering of Figure 25, respectively.
  • the parentheses are short or zero tone syllable symbols, and the square brackets are short code practical frequency data.
  • the initial and final vowel layouts of the Chinese syllabic of the "XIY" keyboard of Fig. 8 and the sequenced double vowels of Fig. 27 are used, and the maximum input code length is limited to 4, and the following double splicing code is used to add the number of rhymes.
  • the method of inputting the number of short code words of the mother-in-law inputting any coded character by the first keystroke. If it is an initial, it is combined with the single-sequence of the sequence to form the sequence of the rhyme, which is specified in the digital line and prompts the syllabic code of Figure 21. Word, in which the single vowels "e” and “eng” and their corresponding vowels are interchanged; the next keystroke uses any number of single vowels, directly inputting its vowels and ends the process;
  • the second coded character is further input. If the input is a valid arpeggio code, the double tone of the sequence is added to form two sets of sequence sounds, which are specified in the digital line and the sequence is indicated.
  • Syllable short code words and syllable symbols Use any digit of the left-hand keystroke, directly input the syllable short codeword corresponding to the left-hand single tone, or use any digit of the right-hand keystroke, directly input the syllable symbol corresponding to the right-hand single tone , thereby ending the process; or after inputting any syllable symbol, according to the descending order of the keystrokes of the previously keystrokes and the digits of the finger to be input, sequentially prompting one or more groups of the descending order of the practical frequency, each group of up to 12 a homophone, press the key again to use the homophone that is prompted by any digital input to end the process; otherwise, enter the third encoded character further, if the input is a valid phonological and initial
  • the fourth coded character is further input, and if the input is a valid sound and rhyme coding, the double-speech-encoded additional sequence number-simplified code word input mode is used. The process is terminated by a digital input of the doubled word suggested, or any single word thereof; for a specific input method, see the subsequent embodiment.
  • the invention may use a "QWERTY” keyboard (Fig. 3 or Fig. 4), or a modified “AWF” keyboard (Fig. 5 or Fig. 6), and a newly designed “XIY” keyboard (Fig. 7 or Fig. 8) or “HIY”.
  • "Keyboard ( Figure 9 or Figure 10) collectively referred to as the alphabetic keyboard.
  • use the virtual keyboard of the alphanumeric keyboard that is, display the graphic of the alphanumeric keyboard on the display, click the left or right mouse button to simulate the keystroke input mode of the alphanumeric keyboard; or use the touch screen to display the alphanumeric keyboard graphic (Fig. 11-20)
  • Use a finger or a special pen to click or touch and press the key to simulate the keystroke input mode of the alphabetic keyboard.
  • Each character key of the keyboard is marked with a regular character and its upper character, which is called a character layout.
  • the characters marked are limited by the number of character keys, and are generally about 35 pairs.
  • pairs of uppercase and lowercase letters only mark uppercase letters in the upper left corner of the character key; regular characters that are not letters are marked in the lower left corner of the character key, and the upper character is marked in the upper left corner of the character key.
  • the invention can directly input the numerical sequence short code by using the digital code, because the digital originally does not participate in the encoding, and after the digital sequential symbol is specified, the encoding is participated as a special encoding character, which is the encoding of the input encoding.
  • Characters which are quite different from general coded characters: after inputting each coded character, if the input number is used as the end of the code, the code is involved. If the number is not entered, the code is not involved, and the subsequent coded characters are continued. Until the maximum input code length is reached. That is to say, the sequence short code can be input directly or directly, and does not directly participate in the encoding of characters.
  • the existing Chinese character encoding input method uses only a space or a number 1 to input a short code, because the correspondence between the encoded character and the digital is not found, and the short code cannot be specified by using the digital instead of the encoded character, and the digital can only be used as the serial number of the recode. Select the symbol.
  • the invention adds a sequence of symbols, and associates the characters with the fingerstrokes with the digital, which completely solves the problem.
  • the number sequence short code can be regarded as a direct improvement of the digital sequence code. Both use digital as the additional number sequence code, but there are essential differences: each number is specified differently and differently, with a specific meaning.
  • the digital symbol is composed of a sequence of symbols in numerical order.
  • the sequence-sequence code uses the sequence code symbols to distinguish one from another and is no longer a heavy code. Therefore, the number sequence symbol is a key difference between the number sequence short code and the digital sequence code.
  • the digital sequence short code is sequentially designated on the digital key according to its sequence code symbol, which is equivalent to the digital sequential code, and is directly input using the digital key.
  • any existing Chinese character encoding input method can be used to specify the numerical sequence short code, and both can be improved and improved, and the number of short codes can be increased by about 10 times.
  • the improvement and improvement effect are quite different. It mainly depends on how much the same information is between the symbols of the same fingerstroke. The more the same information, the easier it is to merge and integrate. The more standardized, the easier it is to remember.
  • the premise is that the digital is not used as a coded character, that is, it does not directly participate in the encoding, because once the digital directly participates in the encoding, there is no difference from the character and the independence is lost, and the digital short code specified by the digital code cannot be directly input.
  • the number sequence symbol is the basis of the sequence short code.
  • the sequence code symbol must first be specified, which can be either a code symbol or a shape code symbol, or a combination of sound and shape symbols. All the symbols specified by the same column of character keys are also specified as digital sequence symbols, or directly in the digital line. If the same column of symbols does not have common information, it is a direct combination of the same column of symbols. If the symbols in the same column have the same kind of information, they can be combined to extract the same kind of information, and the sequence number symbols are more simplified.
  • the number sequence short code is specified according to the input code additional number sequence symbol, because it involves a specific coding process, which is very complicated for the shape code input method, and can be replaced with a simple and intuitive method for convenience of description, that is, in each column Selecting the sequence short code in the existing short code of the upper level of the character to be input, and forming the sequence short code of the level in numerical order: one of the high level one short codes specified by each column character key, that is, 3 lines 11 columns specified by the 11-character key, and up to 3 high-level short codes of each column are respectively designated on the digital keys of the same fingerstroke key, that is, reduced to 11 digital short codes.
  • the short code input method of the original additional space can be retained, and if the positive index method is used, the short code input method of the supplementary digital 1 can be retained. It can be applied to any prior art, whether it is a phonetic code or a shape code, and is another simple means of correlating the characters of the same fingerstroke with the digital.
  • the shape code symbol mainly uses the combination of the root of the Chinese character, the stroke and the stroke or the root, but the general shape code symbol, the symbol specified by the character key of the same column is disordered, and it is difficult to merge with each other, so the number of the shape code
  • the sequence symbol is almost always a direct combination of all the shape code symbols in the column, and the sequence code symbols are difficult to integrate and simplify.
  • the shape code symbol is not directly related to the character of the specified character key.
  • the shape code symbol can be specified on any character key of any alphabet keyboard, and the symbol layout is basically not restricted by the character layout. Flexible, so the relative position between the shape code symbols is the key to the symbol layout. Therefore, the symbol layout of the shape code has a large adjustment space, and appropriate adjustments can be made to better implement the present invention.
  • the "five-word" symbol layout of the prior art 2 is a good example, and the symbol can be decomposed into a combination of the first stroke and the second stroke of the radical, and the same symbol of the first stroke or the second stroke is relatively easy to integrate.
  • the general shape code symbols are not available. But unfortunately, the symbol layout of the bottom row of character keys deviates from the column-to-layout rule of other symbols, and the layout of the symbols must be adjusted.
  • the sequence number symbols can be simplified, otherwise the sequence code of each column of character keys can be simplified. Meta is just a simple merge of each symbol. The invention firstly explains how to directly increase the number sequence short code by using the "five pen type" prior art, further improve the symbol layout and better specify the number sequence short code, thereby explaining how to specify the number order of the shape code. Short Code.
  • the five-stroke input method, the root-coded root symbol of the oblique-column fingering method is: 1 Gongjin, 2 Murenxiang, 3 Dayue, 4 Tubai, 5 Wanghezi, 6 eyes, 7 Rishan, 8 saliva , 9 Tian Huo, 0; each number is added to 1 is the number of the root symbol of the positive index.
  • the following is based on the numbered root symbol of the five-stroke symbol of the oblique column fingering, indicating how to specify the number sequence shortcode.
  • the original one-level short code can be reserved, and one character is added with one space to input; the corresponding first-order digital short code is input by using one character plus one digit.
  • the two shortcode keystrokes are the same and are placed under the same code input condition.
  • This method of specifying the numbered short code has the advantage of more room for selection, and can overturn all the short code re-selections of the five-stroke input method; but the disadvantage is also here: abandon all the short codes of the five-stroke input method, Only suitable for new users; those skilled users not only need to re-remember the shortcode, but even conflict with the original short code to cause confusion, so it is not advisable to advocate, the following will not be mentioned.
  • the easiest and most effective way is to specify the shortcode of the number directly using the original shortcode of the Wubi input method.
  • the shortcode layout of the code is as follows:
  • the numerical order short code of the oblique column fingering can be divided into 1 "column open”, 2 "zhen end mutual", 3 "day to day”, 4 "bead to wife", 5 "rose five", 6 "under jade”
  • select a short code as the first-order short code of the G key.
  • the short code of the reference key row can be selected, and the first order number of the G key is in the order of: gl open, g2 end, g3 day, g4 in, g5 five, g6, g7, g8, g9 Or select the short code of the previous line of the base key, then the first-order numerical code short code of the g key is: gl column, g2zhen, g3 table, g4 bead, g5 rose, g6 jade, G7 flat, g 8 not, g9; or select the single-word or single-word with higher practical frequency in the second-level short code of each column character key as the first-order digital short code of the g key.
  • the practical frequency statistics of a single word are: 1 "column 2172 open 7068", 2 "zhen 442 end 3263 mutual 957”, 3 “table 4718 days 6961 to 47164", 4 "bead 514 at 26514 wife 500 ", 5" rose 0 5 21372 ⁇ 191 ", 6 "Jade 816 under 28622 and 32341", 7 "Ping 5709, 2200 now 2076", 8 "No 72,343 things 6612", 9 “to 39952 draw 3027”. Therefore, the order number of short codes is selected as follows: gl column, g2 end, g3 to, g4, g5, g6, g7, g8, g9.
  • all the short code layouts of the two-level short code to be input can obtain the first-order digital short code of 25 coded characters.
  • the oblique column refers to the first-order digital short code, and each digit is incremented by one, which is the positive-order first-order numerical sequence short code.
  • first-order digital short codes is only about one-third of the number of five-character two-level short codes, since the 25 character keys have 10 first-order numerical short codes, it is a five-character first-level simple 10 times the number of codes, and the number of two-key short code words can be up to 250 by pressing the keystroke twice. If the original first-level short code is added, the total number is 275, which is commonly used. The input efficiency will undoubtedly increase dramatically.
  • the shortcode layout of the three-level short code to be input is obtained as follows:
  • the second-order short code of the five-stroke symbol can be specified as: fjl ⁇ , fj2han, fj3, fj4, fj5, fj6, fj7 ⁇ , fj8, fj9 ⁇ , fjO enter.
  • sequence short codes of other various levels of oblique or positive index are limited by the symbol layout of the existing five-stroke input method.
  • the five-character symbols in the fifth region of the five-character symbol layout are respectively shifted by one key position, destroying the times of other symbol roots.
  • Stroke column layout although the number of short codes can also be increased, it is difficult to maximize the advantages of the sequence short code of the present invention, mainly that all five symbols of each column of character keys lack common information, and it is difficult to merge and simplify each other. Can only be combined into a number of root symbols, can not be further simplified into a number of stroke symbols.
  • the same strokes are the same for the five strokes of the same row. Therefore, the number of root symbols is reduced to a number of stroke symbols: (I, B) respectively with a combination of 1 B, 2, 3 4 I, 5 -; and (a J) respectively with 6 -, 7
  • Figure 3-6 shows the layout of the five-stroke symbols.
  • the middle line of each character key is five symbols, including the first stroke and the second stroke of the key name and its symbol root, and the root symbol of each digit combined with the character key of the fingerprint key, respectively
  • the numerical order is the root symbol of the number, and the improved location code is compiled according to the first stroke and the second stroke, and is marked in the braces in the upper right corner of the character key.
  • the number sequence root symbol of Figure 3-6 can be further simplified: the stroke in the upper right corner of each digital key is the digital symbol of the first stroke of the root, and the stroke of the bottom line of each digital key is the stroke of the root stroke.
  • the digital symbol, the left-hand digital key is one type, and the right-hand digital key is another type.
  • the first stroke of each digital root is combined with the root stroke and the stroke is arranged in numerical order, that is, the number of stroke symbols.
  • Figure 5 and Figure 4 five-stroke symbol layout, oblique column fingering Figure 3 number sequence root symbol is: 1 child and township, 2 vertical fire, 3 white gold, 4 days Tianshan, 5 soil woodworking, 6 Wang Da , 7 head mouth, 8 wo month, 9 words water, 0 has female; each number is added 1 is the number of the root symbol of its positive index. The number of stroke symbols combined with the first stroke and the second stroke of the five-character radical can be reduced respectively.
  • Figure 3 is: 1 B, 2, 3 J, 4 I, 5-, respectively combined with (
  • Figure 5 and Figure 6 five-stroke symbol layout, oblique column fingering
  • the number of the root-sequence symbol of Figure 5 is: 1 female and township, 2 water fire, March gold, 4 Tianshan, 5 woodworking, 6 king soil , 7 mesh day, 8 Wo white, 9 words, 0 have children; each number is added to 1 is its positive column fingering the numerical sequence root symbol of Figure 6. It can be simplified to the number of stroke symbols combined with the first stroke and the second stroke of the five-stroke root.
  • the sequenced stroke symbols of Figure 5 are: 1 B, 2, 3 J, 4
  • FIG. 5 and FIG. 6 similar other five-stroke symbol layouts can be designed.
  • the reference key row of the left zone, the right zone, or the left zone and the right zone and the previous row the five-character symbol exchange key specified by the character key of each column That is, it becomes a plurality of embodiments of the new pen stroke five-character layout.
  • each input of five pen symbols the input code is sequentially combined with each digital symbol of the number sequence root symbol, and the corresponding target character set is sequentially selected.
  • a single word or a single word with a higher practical frequency is specified as a sequence short code corresponding to each number.
  • all the symbols of each column are combined with the input codes to specify the digital sequence short code of each digital, that is, the symbols of each character key are separately involved in the coding, and the number sequence is specified.
  • the symbols of each column of three character keys are combined into a digital root symbol, or simplified into a digital stroke symbol, which constitutes a sequence root symbol or a sequence of stroke symbols, and then is added as a previously input code. Encode and specify its sequence short code.
  • the Wubi input method is the most popular form-code input method. Therefore, you can use any of the above-mentioned improved five-stroke symbol layouts to replace the coded characters of each symbol in the code table of the Wubi input method with new code characters. First replace it with the corresponding two-character uppercase characters, and then replace them with single-character lowercase and uppercase characters once, and then get the new five-symbol layout word code table, and compile the corresponding Chinese character encoding input software.
  • the program can be implemented.
  • the number sequence short code can then be specified by the method of selecting the number sequence short code in the high level one existing short code to be input in each column character.
  • the improved five-character symbol layout of Figure 3-6 the five stroke symbols specified by each column of character keys have the first stroke of the same symbol root, so the combined digital symbols can be simplified to the same
  • the combination of the first stroke of the symbol root and the secondary stroke of the different symbol root, the correspondence between the digital symbol and each digit is simplified to the correspondence between the first stroke of the symbol root and its number, because one The number corresponds to the first stroke of a symbol root.
  • the second stroke of the five-character root is part of the left area, and the other part is in the right area, so that the first stroke of the five-character root is also divided into the left and right areas, which is still relatively messy.
  • the most advantageous advantage of the digital sequence short code technology is the audio code Chinese character encoding input method, because the audio code symbols can be easily split or merged, especially the single finals split by the finals, the number is 12, and The number of numbers just matches. There are only 4 or 5 tone symbols, and the tone of the two groups is only 10, which is similar to the number of digits. When you need it, you can input the tone. If you don't need it, you don't need to input the tone. You can make full use of the sequence shortcode as an additional. The main features of the code.
  • the code-coded Chinese character code input method divides the phonetic syllable symbols of the target Chinese words into Chinese phonetic symbols, and then converts them into Chinese characters according to the code input. Simply use a subset of the numbered symbols, a subset of them, to specify their numbering shortcodes, which is much simpler.
  • the audio code input method is always input as the first symbol of each single-word pronunciation, and is also an indispensable main symbol in the word coding, and is not used for the digital sequence short code, so it can be in the digital sequence symbol. Directly abandoned.
  • All of the code-coded Chinese character encoding input methods of the present invention are based on the Mandarin standard pronunciation of Chinese characters, wherein the multi-tone words are encoded and input according to the standard pronunciation of the Chinese characters in a specific non-single word.
  • the sound, mediation, rhyme, and tune information of Chinese characters are simply referred to as the basic information of Chinese characters, such as sound, media, rhyme, and tone.
  • the words "reading" are omitted below.
  • the phonetic symbols can use Chinese pinyin symbols or phonetic symbols, or the Chinese phonetic symbols of the prior art 1, and Figures 1 and 2 are their symbol comparison tables, wherein the Chinese alphabet symbols are preferred symbols.
  • the present invention is based on the concept of more accurate, stricter and more general Chinese phonetic symbols, and differs from some concepts of Chinese pinyin or phonetic symbols: the initials that do not include double initials are monophonic, and the single mother includes not only
  • the mediators i, u and U also include the "hu” in "h", zhu, shu, chu in the double initials, which can be simplified to "v”; the acoustic mediator includes a monophonic mother, and a monophonic and a single mother.
  • the vowel without the mother is called a single vowel, but the vowel includes a single vowel, which is regarded as a vowel without a mother; the combination of the vowels, i, u and U, which are not combined with the vowel, is called zero vowel, which distinguishes the tone.
  • the zero vowel is a combination of the same tone tuner i, u and U, which can be represented by its tone symbol.
  • sequence-order single tone or double tone directly specified in the digital line and the sequence-single-single vouchers directly designated in the digital line or merged with the vowels are the sequence-sequence symbols of the vocoding Chinese character coding input method, respectively Explain in detail.
  • the invention uses the digital input tone of the finger input keystroke with the highest input efficiency, that is, the tone symbols of the Yinping, Yangping, Shangsheng and the de-sounding, and sequentially designates the digital keys of 4, 5, 6, and 7 for the oblique column fingering, or For the positive column fingering, the numeric keys of 5, 6, 7, and 8 are sequentially designated to greatly improve the input efficiency of the tone symbols, which is called a digital sequence single tone.
  • the code lines of Figures 3-6 are all examples.
  • the tonal symbols arranged in descending order of the practical frequency that is, the de-sounding, the yin-flat, the yangping, and the upper-sounding are respectively designated on the digital keys of the index finger, the middle finger, the ring finger and the little finger of the left hand, respectively, and may be referred to as a left tone;
  • the right-handed index finger, middle finger, ring finger and little finger are used to press the key on the digital key, which can be called the right tone.
  • Figure 24 is an embodiment of a sequenced double tone of the oblique column fingering
  • Figure 25 is an embodiment of the positive column fingering of Figure 24
  • Figure 26 is another embodiment of a sequenced double tone of the oblique column fingering
  • Figure 27 This is an embodiment of the positive-column fingering corresponding to FIG.
  • the oblique index refers to the numbers 5 and 6 of Fig. 24, or the numbers 4 and 7 of Fig. 26, the digits 6 and 7 of the positive fingering map 25, or the numerals 5 and 8 of Fig. 27, which may be vacant or respectively designated as zero tones.
  • the soft tone can be specified on an unoccupied, input-inefficient digital key, or softly combined with a flat or de-sound without specifying a soft digital.
  • the digital sequence short code input method After inputting any sound and medium rhyme coding, the number sequence single tone to be input is added, and the sound sequence of the sequence is composed, and the corresponding numerical order target Chinese character is selected, and the practical frequency is selected.
  • One or more groups each group of up to 6 words or single words, respectively designated on the digital key of the single-order single tone; and select the other words or singles of the same sound medium with higher practical frequency Words, specified on other digital keys; specify and prompt one or more sets of syllable short code words in the digital line, the next keystroke uses any number of single-order single tone, directly input its syllable short code word , or using other syllabic short code words prompted by the digital input, thereby ending the process, referred to as a sound-synchronized code-added number-single-tone single-sequence short code word input mode;
  • the sequenced double tones to be input are added to form two sets of sequenced phonological tones; a set of sequenced tones specifies and prompts the syllabic syllabic words of the sequence, and the other set of numbers
  • the tonal tone specifies and prompts the syllable symbol of the sequence; the next keystroke uses any number of double tones, directly inputting its syllable short code word or syllable symbol to end the process; or further prompting a group of input syllable symbols or Multiple groups, each group of up to 12 homophones with higher practical frequency.
  • any digital input to end the process, which is collectively referred to as the sequence of the number of double-tones.
  • Short code audio input mode After inputting any Chinese syllable symbol, select one or more groups with higher practical frequency in the syllable, each group of up to 12 single words or single words, according to the descending order of their practical frequency, and then specify the right index finger in turn.
  • the single-word or single-word word whose practical frequency is descending can also be called the digital-sequence short-coded word input mode of the sound-synchronized coded additional serial number, and is directly input by using the prompted digital key.
  • the digital sequence double tone is more advantageous than the single tone.
  • two sets of tone symbols are specified.
  • One set of tone symbols is input into the syllable short code words, which can input the most commonly used words of each syllable more efficiently, and another set of tone symbols.
  • Input syllables suitable for beginners in Chinese, can input Chinese characters and their syllables interactively without switching the input mode; or further prompt the homophones of the input syllables, using the traditional digital selection input method, input more More homophones.
  • the process ends, and the method of inputting the sequence code of the character code-added number-sequence symbol up to this point is collectively referred to as the number-sequence short-coded word input method of the character code-added number-order tone.
  • the input two-syllable rhyme is regarded as a double-syllable word, and whether or not the double-word is repeated, each double-syllable word and its first word and the last word form a sequence of word words; Deducing the keystroke efficiency of the keystroke finger and the finger to be input digitally, sequentially designating one or more sets of total practical frequency descending word sequence in the digital line; using the prompted digital input any two-syllable word, or The process ends with any one of the words, and is called a double-sequence coded additional numbered sequence-simplified code word input mode. In the subsequent embodiments, it is described in detail.
  • the commonly used single word can be blindly input, thereby completely solving the problem that the single word that is commonly used in the audio code input method needs to be input.
  • the shape code input method blindly typing the input word is no longer a unique advantage, the main difference between the code and the shape code Can be eliminated, will greatly enhance the status of the code.
  • the input method of full spelling and simple spelling has low input efficiency, which is a helpless choice for audio code users. Only the word-simplification of the double-spelling input method can maximize its advantages.
  • the process ends, and the character encoding short-coded short code input method of the character encoding additional number-sequence symbol up to this point is collectively referred to as the character-coded short-coded short word input of the character encoding additional sequenced tone. method.
  • the above-mentioned audio code Chinese character encoding input method is an implementation manner of the technical solution 4, and the specific implementation manner thereof is an input method of the acoustic medium rhyme, including the technical solutions 5, single initial, single initial, double initial, single final, respectively input, single initial , the single mediation and the single finals are respectively input into the technical solution 6, and the initials and the finals are respectively input into the technical solution 7.
  • These three technical schemes input any sound, the number of keystrokes can be reduced to 4, 3, 2, which can be called four spells, three spells and double spells. The four spells correspond to the full spell of the prior art. Originally, the maximum number of keystrokes can be input 6 times to input any rhyme.
  • a single vowel of up to 3 letters can be replaced by 1 digit. , so it can be reduced to four spells, which can also be called Jane spells; the three spells are the sound masterbatch combination input and then add a digital single vowel, while the double spells directly specify the double initials and the master and the single
  • the combination of the finals is the input of the finals, and the number of keystrokes can be reduced.
  • the single vowel of the numerical order can be directly specified in the digital line, and the numerical sequence single vowel specified by the digital line of the oblique line fingering of FIG. 3 or the positive index fingering can be used.
  • the single-final vowel specified by the numerical row of Figure 6 or the positive-column fingering of Figure 6 or the single-final specified by each column of the character keys of prior art 1, also specified in the same finger-clicking key constitutes a sequence single vowel; or further, the single vowel is also referred to as a character single vowel on the reference key line or the previous line, and the same keystroke key, for example, the reference key of FIG.
  • 3-10 can be directly used.
  • the single vowel of the previous line, or the single vowel specified on the one-line character key of the prior art 1 does not need to be specified if the character single vowel is not used.
  • the first key input enters the first word single initial, zh and z, sh and s, ch and c are respectively combined, or separately specify the key of the double initial zh, sh, ch, so that the first keystroke is also input the first double initial, otherwise Press the key twice to input the first word double initials; each input one letter, the input single initial or double initial, add the sequenced single vowel to be input, form the sequence of the rhyme, each rhyme and its rhyme contains i, u and All the sounds of U, the corresponding number of target Chinese characters, select one or more groups, each group of up to 12 single words or single words with higher practical frequency, using the single vowel digital in turn, in the digital line Specify and prompt one or more sets of sequence rhythm short code words, the next keystroke uses any number of the sequence single vowel, directly input its vowel short code word and end the process, called the initial coded additional number order
  • the final code of the finals is a short code word input mode.
  • Figure 21 is a specific embodiment of the syllabic codeword of the oblique column fingering. Each digit is shifted down by one, that is, 1 is added respectively, which is the corresponding embodiment of the positive column fingering; or the single vowel "e” and “eng” and its corresponding phonological short code word exchange key, which is another embodiment of the phonological short code word. If 2 11 and 2 , sh and s, ch and c are respectively combined, it can be called “the southern sound input method of the initials", and the practical frequency of each group of 2 11 and 2 , 811 and 8 , ch and c can be compared.
  • the high Chinese characters are designated as the combined shorthand words of the arpeggio, or the abbreviated short code words of all the single initials are discarded, or the shorthand words of all the double initials are discarded.
  • the first word mother is further input, so that the first word initial is input by the maximum number of keystrokes; the numbered single vowel to be input is added, and the sound sequence of the sequence is composed, and the corresponding numerical order In the target Chinese character, select one or more groups, each group of up to 12 single words or single words with higher practical frequency, and specify and prompt one or more sets of sound sequence rhyme code words in the digital line.
  • the second keystroke uses any number of single vowels, directly inputting its vocal code and ending the process, called sound mediation.
  • the mother code adds a sequence-single-single-single-single-simplified codeword input mode.
  • the audio code word is the more than 400 short code words specified by all "no syllables".
  • the existing code code Chinese character code input method is involved and will not be described in detail.
  • the character of the first word can be further input by using any character of the character single vowel; and the number sequence simple word input mode of the numbered single tone is added by using the sound phonological code.
  • the process ends, and the character encoding short-coded short-code input method of the character encoding additional number-sequence symbol is used, which is collectively referred to as the initial-coded short-coded mother-in-law. method.
  • each sound and rhyme, and its rhyme contains all the sounds and sounds of 1, u and U, corresponding to the number of target two-syllable words, select one or more groups, each A group of up to 12 two-syllable words with higher practical frequency, which are specified in the digital line and suggest one or more sets of sequenced sound and rhyme short coded two-syllable words, and the next keystroke uses the second-word single-final A digital number, directly inputting its short code double-syllable words and ending the process, is called a sound-synchronized rhyme and initial consonant coded number-single-single-single-sequence short-coded word input mode.
  • the thousands of double-syllable words that are most commonly used are designated as short-coded double-syllable words, and can be input only in the subsequent digital-sequential short-word word input mode of the double-sound-encoding code to improve the input efficiency.
  • short-coded double-syllable words the thousands of double-syllable words that are most commonly used are designated as short-coded double-syllable words, and can be input only in the subsequent digital-sequential short-word word input mode of the double-sound-encoding code to improve the input efficiency.
  • the sub-words so as to input the sound and the sound, and add the sequenced single vowel to be input, and form the sequence of the sound and the rhyme, the corresponding number.
  • the two-tone word of the sequence target one or more sets of two-syllable words with higher practical frequency are selected, and one or more sets of sequenced sounds and sounds are used in the digital line.
  • the next keystroke uses any digit of the second-character single-final, directly inputting its short-coded double-syllables and ending the process, which is called the sound-synchronized and the syllabic code. .
  • the two-syllable words of sound and rhyme and sound are actually two-syllable words that do not distinguish between tones. They are the most commonly used word-coding methods in the prior art and will not be further explained.
  • any character of the character single vowel to input the sound and the rhyme, and use the double-tone vowel coding to add the sequence number of the short code word input mode, and then End the process using the two-syllable word suggested by either digital input, or any of its words; or omit the process and use only the previous step to enter the two-syllable word.
  • the process is automatically terminated, and the character encoding short-coded short code input method of the character encoding additional numbered symbols is used, which is collectively referred to as the initial sequence of the initials.
  • Word input method If the encoding of the maximum input of two words is not limited, the encoding of the initials, the acoustic mediator and the acoustic melody of 3, 4, 5 or more words may be further input, and the corresponding numerical order voicing mother is continuously added. The sequence short code ends until any digital input short code is used.
  • any Chinese character encoding input method of full spelling or simple spelling Enter the single initials for the first keystroke, input the single mother with the keystroke again, and input any one of the initials by pressing the key twice.
  • the Chinese character of the alphanumeric keyboard is also used to specify the Chinese initial symbol, or converted to Chinese pinyin or phonetic symbol, not subject to Character layout restrictions. The specific implementation is as follows:
  • the specified single final vowel is also specified to form a sequenced single vowel on the digital key of the same keystroke key; or further, a single vowel is also designated as a character list on the reference key row or the same row and the same finger key character key.
  • the finals for example, can directly adopt the single finals of the previous line of the reference key of Fig. 3-10, or use the single finals specified on the single-line character keys of the prior art 1, and do not need to be specified if the character single finals are not used. Or further specifying the numbered single tone or double tone to form a number The rhyme adjustment, if you do not use the tone symbol, you do not need to specify.
  • the first keystroke enters the first word single initial, and the numbered single vowel to be input is added to form the sequence rhyme.
  • Each rhyme and its rhyme contains all the sounds of 1, u, U, h and hu or v.
  • one or more groups each group of up to 12 single words or single words with higher practical frequency are selected, and one or more sets of sequenced sound rhyming code words are specified in the digital line.
  • the next keystroke uses any number of the single-sequence single-final, directly inputting its acrobatic short-coded word and ends the process, which is called the mono-acoustic coding plus the number-single-single-single-sequence short-coded word input mode.
  • the difference from the number-simplified codeword input mode of the initial sequence of the initials is that the first keystroke does not input the double initial, so in Figure 21, the syllabic codes of zh and z, sh and s, ch and c Words, either with a single initial or with a double initial, or combined separately, with a high practical frequency.
  • the first word single mediator is further input, so that the maximum number of keystrokes is input twice, and the numbered single vowel to be input is added to form a sequence of sounds, corresponding to In the numerical order target Chinese character, select one or more groups, each group of up to 12 single words or single words with higher practical frequency, specify and prompt one or more sets of sequenced sound in the digital line.
  • the next keystroke uses any number of single vowels, directly inputting its syllabic simplification code and ends the process, which is called the monophonic coded additional numbered single vowel of the numbered short code word input mode;
  • any character of the character single vowel input the first word sound; using the sound phonological code to add the numerical order single tone of the digital sequence short code word input mode, directly Entering any syllable short code word to end the process; or using the sound phonological code to add a sequenced double tone digital sequence short code word input mode, directly input any syllable short code word or syllable symbol to end the process Or further input any homophone of the input syllable symbol, and then end the process; or omit this step, without using the tone symbol, use only the previous step to input the word.
  • the sub-word initial can be further input, the input sound and the initial encoding, and the sequence-single vowel to be input is added to form the sequence of the sound and rhyme, each Each of the sounds and rhymes, and their rhymes contain all the sounds and rhymes of i, u, U, h, and hu or v, and the corresponding number of target two-syllable words, one or more groups are selected.
  • the second word single mother so as to input the sound and the sound, and add the sequenced single vowel to be input, and form the sequence of the sound and the rhyme
  • the corresponding number In the two-tone word of the sequence target, one or more sets of two-syllable words with higher practical frequency are selected, and one or more sets of sequenced sounds and sounds are used in the digital line
  • the next keystroke uses any digit of the second-character single-final, directly enters its short-coded double-syllable and ends the process, which is called the monophonic and mono-media coding.
  • the two-syllable word of sound and rhyme that is, the two-syllable word that does not distinguish the tone, is the most commonly used word coding method in the prior art, and will not be further explained.
  • the process ends, and the number encoding method of the character encoding additional number sequential symbols of the character encoding so far is collectively referred to as the order of the number of the monosyllabic coded sequence Shortcode word input method. If you do not limit the encoding of up to two words, you can further enter 3, 4, 5 or more words for the single initial, the acoustic mother and the sound. Encoding, and continually appending the corresponding sequence-sequence code of the number-sequence to the end, using any digital input shortcode.
  • any Chinese character encoding input method of double spelling input the initials by the first keystroke, input the finals by pressing the key again, and input a sound medium twice by pressing the key twice.
  • the ordinary double-spelling Chinese character encoding input method because the symbol layout of the vowel is not specified according to the correspondence between the row and the column of the vowel and the final, the number-sequence symbol is also a messy combination of all the vowels of the same column of character keys. It is difficult to merge and simplify, so there is no advantage. Only the symbol layout of the vowels can be specified according to the row-column correspondence between the mother and the vowel. All the vowels of the same column of characters can be merged and simplified.
  • the single-final of the numerical order is also directly specified in the digital line.
  • the character keys of the same type of keystrokes are different from the numeric keys, and the single vowels specified are not identical, the two single vowels will interfere with each other, causing unnecessary confusion, which is not involved below.
  • the prior art 1 has many embodiments of double-stitched symbol layouts, especially melodic layouts. The following description will not be repeated, and only a few preferred dual-composition symbol layout embodiments of the present invention will be described.
  • Figure 3-10 shows the symbol layout example of the Chinese alphabet symbol of several alphabetic keyboards.
  • the English alphabet with the same glyph is used to indicate the monophone, and the key of the double consonant is directly specified; or the double is replaced by the parentheses.
  • Initials so that you can input Chinese and English interactively. If the southern sound mode is used, that is, 211 and 2 , sh and s, ch and c are respectively combined, the double initials are respectively moved to the same z, s, c key positions of the first character.
  • the bottom line of each character key is the mediation of the combination of the mediation of the Chinese mother symbol and the single final.
  • the single vowels and tones marked on the top line of the digital key are the single-sequence single vowels combined with the prime vowels of the same keystrokes, and the directly specified numerical order single tones, which can be combined into a numerical order.
  • the digital single tone can also be replaced by the digital double tone of the same fingering in Figure 24-27.
  • Figure 3 and Figure 4 are the symbol layout of the Chinese vowel based on the "QWERTY" keyboard.
  • the combination of the "mother and single vowel" symbols in each column of character keys is also specified on the digital keys of the same fingerstroke.
  • the mediator of the digital symbol can be omitted, that is, it is simplified to a single final with no distinction between the mediators.
  • the numerical order rhyme of Figure 3 is simplified to la, 2ang, 3e, 4 ⁇ er, 5 ' an, 6 v en, 7, eng, 8au, 9eu, Oei, -ai, or the order
  • the tone is replaced by the sequenced double tone of Figure 24 or 26; its positive fingering is reduced to 2a, 3ang, 4e, 5 ⁇ er, 6 ' an, 7 v en, 8, eng, 9au , Oeu, - ei, +ai, or replace the sequence-single tone with the sequence-order double tone of Figure 25 or 27.
  • FIG. 5 and FIG. 6 are diagrams of a symbol layout of a Chinese vowel symbol of the prior art 1, which is referred to as ",, keyboard.
  • the character layout of the "QWERTY" keyboard is completely different from that of FIGS. 3 and 4, Figure 5 and Figure 6 adjust the layout of some characters in order to adapt to the practical frequency of the single finals.
  • the oblique sequence fingering of Figure 5 is in the order of la, 2ang, 3eng, 4 - er, 5 ' an, 6 ⁇ En, 7 e, 8au, 9eu, Oei, -ai, or replace the sequence single tone with the sequence double tones of Figure 24 or 26;
  • the positive fingering of Figure 6 is the order of 2a, 3ang, 4eng , 5 ⁇ er, 6 ' an, 7 v en, 8, e, 9au, Oeu, - ei, -ai, or replace the sequence-single tone with the sequence-order double tone of Figure 25 or 27.
  • Figure 7 and Figure 9 are the same as the Figure 5 and Figure 10.
  • the positive sequence of the positive sequence of Figure 8 and Figure 10 is exactly the same as that of Figure 6, but the characters of Figure 7-10.
  • the symbol layout of its monophonic mother is different.
  • the character layout of Figure 7-10 is redesigned according to the combination rule of the single initials of the Chinese initial symbol, fully considering the particularity of Chinese information, and is the alphabetic keyboard of the best character layout using the Chinese initial symbol. Can be called a Chinese keyboard.
  • the Chinese mother symbol marked in Figure 3-10 can be used.
  • the single vowel "combination symbol is replaced by the Chinese pinyin symbol or the phonetic symbol of the phonetic symbol, and some of the symbols of the Chinese phonetic symbol are mutated or simplified, and it is difficult to separate the mother and the single vowel.
  • the mother and single vowels of the vowel "ong” are "u” and “eng”, while the mother and single vowels of the vowel "ing" are "i” and " eng ".
  • the reason why the symbol layout of the Chinese vowel symbol is first designed and then converted into the symbol layout of the Chinese pinyin symbol or the phonetic symbol is that the purpose of implementing a key is to mark only one vowel symbol, so that the alphabet keyboard and its Using the virtual alphabet keyboard of the touch screen, the layout of the double-stitched symbols is consistent, thereby solving the problem that the virtual alphabet keyboard of the touch screen is inconsistent with the symbol layout of the alphabet keyboard.
  • the Chinese phonetic symbol By slightly improving the Chinese Pinyin symbol, you can get the Chinese phonetic symbol, which overcomes the above shortcomings, especially the single finals, the initials of u and U, which can be merged by omitting the two points on U, so that each character The key only needs to be marked with a vowel symbol. Therefore, based on the Chinese phonetic symbols, the double-composition symbol layout of the Chinese phonetic symbols can be designed to achieve the best design effect, and it can be fully compatible with the Chinese pinyin and phonetic symbols at the level of the combination of the finals.
  • the numerical order single vowel of the oblique indexing of Figure 3 is: la, 2ang, 3e, 4er, 5an, 6en, 7eng, 8au, 9eu, Oei, - ai;
  • Figure 4 is the numerical order single vowel of the positive fingering: 2a , 3ang, 4e, 5er, 6an, 7en, 8eng, 9au, Oeu, - ei, +ai ;
  • the numbered single vowels of the oblique indexing of Figures 5, 7, and 9 are: la, 2ang, 3eng, 4er, 5an , 6en, 7e, 8au, 9eu, 0ei,- ai ;
  • the numerical order single vowels of the positive indexing of Figures 6, 8, and 10 are: 2a, 3ang, 4eng, 5er, 6an, 7en,
  • the input code character is regarded as the initial, and each single vowel that is sequentially combined with the number of the vowels is a sequence-independent phonological tone, and the sequence-independent mediation is sequentially selected.
  • the target character set in the sound medium, the single word or single word with higher practical frequency, is specified as the number sequence sound rhyme short code word corresponding to the single final of each digital.
  • the first keystroke input initials g, and its numbered rhyme, la, 2ang, 3e, 4 ⁇ er, 5 ' an, 6 v en, 7, eng, 8au, 9eu, Oei, - ai are respectively combined
  • the combined sequence acoustics of the combined mediators are: lga, 2gang, 3ge, 5gan, 6gen, 7geng, 8gau, 9 geU , 0 g ei, - ga i.
  • the single-character or single-word with higher practical frequency is selected as the first-order digital shortcode.
  • FIG. 21 is a first-order digital short code of the Chinese initial symbol layout of FIG. 4, that is, a digital sequence vocoded short code word embodiment, where the digit 1 is a conventional first-level short code, and is added with a space or a digital 1 input.
  • Each digit of FIG. 21 is shifted down by one line, which is an embodiment of the first-order digital short code of FIG. 3, that is, the digital sequential sounding simple code word, but the conventional first-level short code of the line of the digital 1 can only add spaces.
  • Input can not add the number 1; if the single vowel "e” in the 4th line of Figure 21 and the single vowel "eng” in the 8th line and the vowels of the same line of the same line, can be used as Figure 6 8, 8, 10 first-order digital short code, that is, the numerical sequence sound rhyme short code word embodiment; further, each digit is further shifted down one line, that is, the first-order digital short code of FIG. 5, 7 and 9 is the number
  • the sequence of the sound rhyme is a simple code word embodiment, but the regular first level short code of the line of the digital 1 can only be input by adding a space.
  • the second coded character If the number has not been entered before, enter the second coded character. If it is a valid tone, add the number order tone of the numbered tone, such as the number of the oblique fingerings in Figure 3, 5, 7, and 9.
  • the single tone of the sequence is 4 _, 5 6 7 , and the sequence of the 4, 6, 8, 10 positive index single tone is 5 _, 6 7 v , 8,.
  • Each of the input phonological rhymes is sequentially combined with the single-tone symbol of the sequence to be a Chinese syllable, and a single word or a single word with a higher practical frequency in each syllable is selected as its syllable short code word, such as the oblique fingering method 22
  • the syllables of the syllables and their syllable short codewords, the numbers in square brackets are the practical frequencies of their single words.
  • the degree data can also be replaced with the utility frequency data of the single word; further, the other words or single words in descending order of the practical frequency are sequentially designated on the numeric keys of 9, 4, 0, 3, 2 and 1, for example, 22 unvoiced syllables and their syllable short codeword embodiments.
  • the word or single word in descending order of the practical frequency is sequentially designated.
  • the position of the prime vowel " ⁇ " on the keyboard, in the right side of the "Tab" key in Fig. 3-10, the left little finger slamming key is used, so that the finger is pressed with the finger to be input.
  • the descending order of the key efficiency is adjusted to the numbers 9, 0, 4, 3, 2, and 1, and the vowels of the numbers 0 and 4 of Fig. 22 should be interchanged because the left and right hands alternately have the highest input efficiency.
  • Figure 22 is shifted to the right by one digit except the digit.
  • the tone is only fixed in the syllable code word of the tone symbol number.
  • the tone of other code sequence syllabic words is not fixed.
  • the purpose is to specify the Chinese characters with higher practical frequency in each voice.
  • One-page digital short code can be found without turning pages to improve input efficiency.
  • Figures 28 and 29 of the positive fingering are embodiments of the syllable short code words and syllable symbols, respectively, in accordance with the sequenced double tones of Fig. 25.
  • Figure 28 shows the number of the right-hand keystroke, and the number of the left-hand keystroke of Figure 29, respectively, using its tone designation and prompting the numbered syllable short codeword, where the numbers 6 and 7 respectively specify a zero tone, and the sound is in the "ba"
  • the single word "bar" with the highest frequency of practicality is designated as the syllabic code word.
  • Figure 28 shows the number of the left-hand keystroke, and the number of the right-hand keystroke of Figure 29, using their tone assignments and prompting the sequenced syllables.
  • All marks except the digits are shifted left by one key, which is the corresponding embodiment of the oblique indexing.
  • the next keystroke uses any number of double tones, enters any syllable short code word or syllable symbol; or further prompts one or more groups of input syllable symbols, each group of up to 12 homophones with higher practical frequency Word, next time the keystroke uses the homophone corresponding to any digital input.
  • the third coded character If the number has not been entered before, enter the third coded character. If it is a valid tone and initial, add the sequence single final.
  • the characters "_" and "+” turn pages forward or backward. Each group promptly prompts up to 12 pairs of double-words to be input, and the double-words with higher frequency of practicality, must pay attention! Previously, only the initials of the second word were input, and the numbered single vowels added did not contain the mother.
  • the combination of the second word has no distinction between the mother and the mother, including not only the sound of the mother, but also the sound.
  • All the phonological rhymes of the mediator i, the mediator u and the mediator U are actually the phonological melody of the undifferentiated mediator classified by the single vowel, rather than the phonology of the usual meaning without the mother. Therefore, the sound and rhyme of the sound, strictly speaking, should be the sound of the first word, the sub-word according to the single vowel classification of the undifferentiated mediation of all the sounds, otherwise it can not cover all the vowels, the practical frequency Higher double words may be missing. Consistent with the rhyming rules of poetry, a single vowel can match.
  • the input is a valid arpeggio and initial "guoj"
  • the effective combination of the first syllable and the second syllables according to the single vowel is lguojia, 2guojiang, 3guojie, guojue, 4guoji, guoju, 5guojian, guojuan, 6guojien, guojuen, 7guojieng guojueng
  • the input is an invalid tone and initials of two words, it is regarded as the sequential combination of the initials of the three words, and the space is added to input the three words determined by the initials of the initials of the three characters, that is, the traditional three
  • the word "sound” is encoded; for example, using the double-composition symbol layout of Figure 3, enter “rmw”, the first two characters are invalid combinations of sounds, so they are treated as 3 words, using "sound”
  • the "three-word code” method is only entered directly by "Nan Niwan".
  • the number has not been input before, enter the 4th coded character. If it is a valid sound and rhyme, it is regarded as a sequence of words.
  • the corresponding double-words are mainly: understanding, etiquette, past, the descending order of the practical frequency of the word sequence is: understanding 1196, theory 2200, solution 4349, (total 7745, etiquette 22, ceremony 888, section 4411, (total) 5321, previous 18, calendar 598, 975, (total) 1591
  • the oblique fingering method is specified in the numeric keys "6, 7, 8, 3, 4, 5, 9, 0, -,, on, the sequence code word short code of the oblique column fingering is: 3 etiquette, 4 ritual, 5 verses, 6 understanding, 7 physics, 8 solutions, 9 epochs, 0 calendars,
  • the index finger and the middle finger take precedence over the last finger and the little finger, the same finger continuous keystrokes, and then specify the practical frequency descending order. Word sequence.
  • sequence code word short code of the oblique index fingering is changed to: 3 understanding, 4 theory, 5 solution, 6 etiquette, 7 ceremony, 8 festivals, 9 calendars, 0 calendars, - session
  • sequence code of the positive fingering is changed to: 1 etiquette, 2 ritual, 3 verses, 4 understanding, 5 physics, 6 solutions, 7 epochs, 8 calendars, 9 sessions.
  • the numerical sequence short code expands the coding space of the double spell input method, especially the word coding space.
  • Commonly used double words are still 4-key input: The mediator that does not distinguish the double-word endings can cover all the thousands of double-words with the highest frequency of practical use. The input efficiency of commonly used double words is not reduced. Then use the double-sound rhyme code to encode the number-sequence short-coded word-word input mode, and the 5-key input double-word or any single word, which only occupies the coding space of the regular double-word and its heavy code, and the re-coded word has no relationship. It can support hundreds of thousands of Chinese words, enough to cover all Chinese double words and the words they contain.
  • the invention as a digital sequence symbol keyboard and an information input method thereof can conveniently perform coding input of Chinese characters.
  • the character or symbol specified by each column of character keys is also designated on the digital key of the same fingerstroke key to form a digital symbol, and then the number of components is respectively arranged in numerical order.
  • the digital is regarded as a non-first key encoded character as an addition to the input code Encoding, thereby specifying a short code by an encoding method, using a digital prompt according to the encoding correspondence with the short code and directly inputting more short codes; using the numerical sequence symbol keyboard of the present invention and the encoding and input method thereof,
  • the invention can be implemented by running the corresponding Chinese character code input processing software program, and has good industrial applicability.

Abstract

A number-order-code-element keyboard and the information input method thereof are provided. The characters or code-elements allocated by the character keys of each column are also allocated on the numeric keys tapped by the same fingers to compose the number-order-code-elements, and/or the number-order-code-elements special for the numbers are allocated directly based on the numeric input efficiency and the actual use frequency of the code-elements special for the numbers. The numbers are used as the additional coding of the input coding, and the brevity codes are allocated on the number row by using a coding method. And further, "wubizixing" code-elements and/or Chinese phonetic symbol code-elements are allocated on the keyboard respectively and more regularly to make it easier to be remembered, and the Chinese words can be input more efficiently. By improving the number-order-overlapping-code input method in which the character codes are attached by sequence numbers to a number-order-brevity-code input method in which the character codes are attached by the number-order-code-elements, the problem that the amount of the brevity codes are too small and spaces must be added to input the brevity codes is solved.

Description

一种数序码元键盘及其信息输入方法  Digital sequence symbol keyboard and information input method thereof
技术领域 Technical field
本发明涉及将零散信息项目转换成为代码形式的一种数序码元键盘及其信息输入方法, 属于汉语信息处理技术领域,尤其属于字母键盘的汉字编码输入处理技术领域。  The invention relates to a digital sequence symbol keyboard for converting a scattered information item into a code form and an information input method thereof, and belongs to the technical field of Chinese information processing, in particular to the technical field of Chinese character code input processing of an alphabet keyboard.
背景技术 Background technique
2008年 11月 19日公开的中国发明专利申请 "一种基于汉语音母的信息输入方法",其国 际公布为: "2007-09-20 W02007/104262 中",称作现有技术 1,是本发明的前期技术之一。  The Chinese invention patent application published on November 19, 2008 "an information input method based on Chinese pronunciation", its international publication is: "2007-09-20 W02007/104262", called prior art 1, is One of the prior art techniques of the present invention.
"五笔字型"字词编码输入法,包括最初的" 86版"简体"优化五笔字型编码法及其键盘, 中国发明专利 CN85100837",以及改进的 "98版"简体和繁体 "规范王码汉字电脑输入法及 其键盘,中国发明专利 CN98100684. 1 " ,统称为现有技术 2,是本发明的前期技术之二。  "Wubi type" word encoding input method, including the original "86 version" simplified "optimized five-stroke type encoding method and its keyboard, Chinese invention patent CN85100837", and improved "98 version" simplified and traditional "standard Wang code" Chinese character computer input method and its keyboard, Chinese invention patent CN98100684. 1 ", collectively referred to as prior art 2, is the second prior art of the present invention.
目前由著名中文网站推广的几种音码汉字编码输入法,每输入一个字符,在数码行提示一 组或多组、 每组 5-10个候选汉字或词,由左至右按其实用频度的降序依次排列,下次击键如 果使用所提示的任一数码输入所对应的候选汉字或词即结束,否则输入下一个编码字符,可称 作字符编码附加序号的数序重码输入方法,称作现有技术 3,在输入方式上最接近本发明。 技术问题  At present, several kinds of audio code Chinese character encoding input methods promoted by famous Chinese websites, each input one character, prompt one or more groups in the digital line, 5-10 candidate Chinese characters or words in each group, press the utility frequency from left to right. The descending order of degree is arranged in turn, and the next keystroke is ended if the candidate Chinese character or word corresponding to any digital input suggested is used, otherwise the next encoded character is input, which may be called the numerical code re-code input method of the character encoding additional serial number. Referring to prior art 3, it is closest to the present invention in terms of input mode. technical problem
现有技术 1的码元布局尚未优化,现有技术 2的字根及笔画的码元布局并不合理,同列的 码元难以合并;现有技术 1和 2的简码很少,补加空格或数字 1才能输入,输入效率很低。  The symbol layout of the prior art 1 has not been optimized, and the symbol layout of the root and the stroke of the prior art 2 is unreasonable, and the symbols of the same column are difficult to be merged; the short codes of the prior art 1 and 2 are few, additional spaces are added. Or the number 1 can be input, and the input efficiency is very low.
现有技术 3尽管使用了很多数码,但都是排序符号,靠屏幕提示才能选择输入,既难以记忆, 也不便于盲打。 由于重码率太高,学术界并不认可,但大多数用户都能接受。 产生其缺陷的主 要原因是,数码与数序重码没有编码对应关系,数序重码之间没有利用编码信息相互区分。  Prior Art 3 Although a lot of digital is used, they are all sorting symbols, and the screen prompts can be used to select input, which is difficult to remember and is not convenient for blind typing. Because the re-coding rate is too high, it is not recognized by the academic community, but most users can accept it. The main reason for the defect is that there is no coding correspondence between the digital and the digital sequence re-code, and the digital-sequence code is not distinguished from each other by the coding information.
其它使用字母键盘的任意一种汉字编码输入法,都是本发明的现有技术,都在使用英文键 盘即 "QWERTY"键盘,即汉语信息 "寄生在"英文键盘上,从来都没有出现真正的汉语键盘。  Any other Chinese character encoding input method using an alphabetic keyboard is the prior art of the present invention, and all of them use the English keyboard, that is, the "QWERTY" keyboard, that is, the Chinese information "parasitic" on the English keyboard, and never appear true. Chinese keyboard.
注音符号和 《汉语拼音方案》 ,也没有匹配的拼音键盘,说明拼音输入法的基础理论就有 所欠缺,只有修改拼音方案才有可能设计出拼音键盘,这是汉字输入法受到约束的根本原因。  The phonetic symbols and the Chinese Pinyin Scheme do not have a matching Pinyin keyboard, indicating that the basic theory of the Pinyin input method is lacking. It is only possible to design a Pinyin keyboard by modifying the Pinyin scheme. This is the root cause of the Chinese input method being constrained. .
反过来说,现有的汉字编码输入法,还没有发展到需要专用的字母键盘或拼音键盘的程度, 说明汉语信息的特殊规律还没有被充分地挖掘和利用,还需要进一步地发展和完善。  Conversely, the existing Chinese character encoding input method has not yet developed to the extent that a special alphanumeric keyboard or pinyin keyboard is needed, indicating that the special laws of Chinese information have not been fully exploited and utilized, and further development and improvement are needed.
几乎所有的汉字编码输入法都有简码输入方式,两键输入的一级简码最多 47个,三键输入 的二级简码最多 1千个,四键输入的三级简码不过几千个。 由于简码很少,又必须补加输入效 率很低的空格或数字 1才能输入,因此即使最常用的简码汉字其输入效率都很低,输入效率较 高的其它数码并没有得到充分地利用,并且使用数码只能输入重码不能输入简码,这是该技术 领域一直都没有解决的普遍难题。 因此,简码的输入方式虽然很普及,但并没有充分发挥其应 有的作用。其根本原因在于:编码字符或码元与数码几乎没有相互关联,同一列的编码字符或 码元难以相互合并,没有使用全部的数码参与简码的编码不能输入更多的简码。  Almost all Chinese character encoding input methods have short code input methods, up to 47 one-level short codes for two-key input, one thousand short codes for three-key input, and three thousand short codes for four-key input. One. Since the short code is rare, it is necessary to add a space or a number 1 with low input efficiency to input. Therefore, even the most commonly used short code Chinese characters have low input efficiency, and other digitals with high input efficiency are not fully utilized. And the use of digital can only enter the weight code can not enter the short code, which is a common problem that has not been solved in the technical field. Therefore, although the input method of the short code is very popular, it does not fully play its due role. The root cause is that the coded characters or symbols are hardly related to the numbers, and the coded characters or symbols in the same column are difficult to merge with each other. Without using all the codes of the digital participation short code, more short codes cannot be input.
汉字编码输入法有音码、 形码和音形码三种,数码一般都不参与编码,达到最大输入码长 或输入结束标记后,如果出现重码则使用数码作为排序符号,提示并且选择输入重码。  The Chinese character encoding input method has three kinds of sound code, shape code and sound shape code. The digital generally does not participate in the encoding. After the maximum input code length or the input end mark is reached, if the weight code appears, the number is used as the sort symbol, and the input and the weight code are selected.
音码汉字编码输入法,主要有全拼、简拼和双拼三种,同音字的重码很多,常用字不能盲打, 是一直没有解决的难题。一般使用 1, 2, 3, 4, 5依次输入阴平,阳平,上声,去声和轻声的声调, 而声调的实用频度降序却是去声、阴平、阳平、上声和轻声,几乎相反;区分声调后,也使用数 码依次提示实用频度降序的同音字,与左手手指输入效率由低至高的顺序也相反,很不合理。 然而,使用汉语音节甚至无需声调,就可以输入大量的非单字词,是任何形码汉字编码输入法 永远都难以企及的,但词编码的优势并没有得到充分地利用,都缺少简码双音词的输入方式。 此外,上世纪末曾经流行过 "双音双拼输入法", "以词带字"输入单字,利用词的编码输入优 势而盲打输入单字,最终却得不偿失。 因此 "以词带字"输入方式还很不完善。 The coded Chinese character encoding input method mainly includes three kinds of full spelling, simple spelling and double spelling. The same code has many heavy codes, and common words cannot be blindly hit, which is a problem that has not been solved. Generally, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 are used to input the Yinping, Yangping, Shangsheng, Deaf and soft tones, while the practical frequency of the tones is descending, but the sound is flat, flat, flat, and soft, almost the opposite. After distinguishing the tones, the homophones in the descending order of the practical frequency are also sequentially displayed in the digital order, and the order of the input efficiency from the left hand to the finger is also reversed, which is unreasonable. However, using Chinese syllables without even tones, you can input a large number of non-single words. Any form-coded Chinese character encoding input method will never be able to match, but the advantages of word encoding are not fully utilized. How to input words. In addition, at the end of the last century, there was a popular "double-tone double-spelling input method", and "words with words" were used to input a single word, and the word input was used to input the word blindly, but in the end it was not worth the candle. Therefore, the "word-to-word" input method is still not perfect.
虽然使用拼音汉字输入法的人数最多,但几乎都在使用输入效率极低的全拼输入法,最多 击键 6次才能输入任一声介韵、即不区分声调的音节,导致全社会人力资源巨大的浪费。输入 效率很高的双拼输入法,介韵母的键位布局至今都没有统一;而且,常规字母键盘的很多键位 指定了不能合并的 2个介韵母,而使用触摸屏虚拟的字母键盘,其字符键很小只能显示一个介 韵母,因此需要增加新的键位,甚至增加整行的键位才容得下 35个介韵母,与常规字母键盘的 介韵母布局差异很大,需要分别地学习和记忆。因此,所指定的 2个介韵母能否合并,尤其是 u 和 U开头、 单韵母相同的介韵母能否合并,是字母键盘与其虚拟键盘能否一致的关键。 英文字 母八、 E、 I和 U的布局,导致介韵母不能 "同行同介母、 同列同韵母",并且 u和 U开头、 韵 母相同的介韵母不能合并,因此需要重新设计字母的布局,尤其是字母 A、 E、 I和 U的布局。  Although the number of people using the Pinyin Chinese character input method is the most, almost all of them use the full-input input method with extremely low input efficiency. Up to 6 keystrokes can be used to input any syllable, that is, syllables that do not distinguish between tones, resulting in huge human resources in the whole society. Waste. The double-input input method with high input efficiency, the key layout of the final vowel has not been unified until now; moreover, many keys of the conventional alphabet keyboard specify two vowels that cannot be merged, and the virtual keyboard of the touch screen is used, the characters are The key is small and can only display one vowel. Therefore, it is necessary to add a new key, and even increase the key of the whole line to accommodate the 35 vowels. The layout of the vowels of the conventional alphabet keyboard is very different, and it is necessary to learn separately. And memory. Therefore, whether the specified two vowels can be combined, especially whether the initial vowels with the same initials and single vowels can be merged is the key to whether the alphabetic keyboard and its virtual keyboard can be consistent. The layout of the English letters VIII, E, I and U causes the vowel to be "the same mother, the same vowel", and the vowels with the same initials and vowels of u and U cannot be merged, so the layout of the letters needs to be redesigned, especially Is the layout of the letters A, E, I and U.
现有的形码输入法,需频繁地切换输入模式才能输入英文与汉字;并且形码的词编码只是 填补空缺的字编码数量有限,一旦音码解决了单字盲打输入的难题,形码也就没有优势了。  In the existing shape code input method, it is necessary to frequently switch the input mode to input English and Chinese characters; and the word code of the shape code is only a limited number of word codes for filling the gap, once the sound code solves the problem of single-word blind typing input, the shape code also There is no advantage.
音形码输入法中,自然码最有代表性,以双拼为主、形码为辅,伹既没有摆脱音码的上述缺 陷,也没有充分发挥形码的技术优势,用户应用的持久性也不如 "五笔字型"等形码输入法。  In the sound shape code input method, the natural code is the most representative, mainly based on double spelling, supplemented by shape code, which does not get rid of the above defects of the sound code, and does not give full play to the technical advantages of the shape code, the durability of the user application. It is also not as good as the "five-stroke type" equivalent code input method.
总而言之,能够准确和快速地盲打输入汉字,至今还是多数人的难题。 难就难在它是一个 异常纷繁和复杂的系统工程,必须逐步地解决好每一个细节问题,再把所有的正确结论综合起 来并且融会贯通,才能在最后一刻总结出完整的解决方案,其结果比任何人的猜测和预想都要 好。 所以,各种现有技术都只是其局部解决方案,都有所偏离才导致上述缺陷,均缺少深厚的 基础理论的引导和支撑,都在使用英文字符为汉字编码,难以突破英文字符布局的固有限制。  All in all, the ability to input Chinese characters blindly and quickly is still a problem for most people. Difficult to be difficult is that it is an unusually complex and complex system engineering, we must gradually solve every detail problem, and then combine all the correct conclusions and integrate them, in order to summarize the complete solution at the last moment, the result is better than Anyone’s guesses and expectations are good. Therefore, all kinds of prior art are only partial solutions, and all of them are deviated to lead to the above-mentioned defects. They lack the guidance and support of deep basic theory. They all use English characters for Chinese characters, which is difficult to break through the inherentity of English character layout. limit.
如果可以面对面地进行口语对话,没有人愿意使用效率很低并且繁难的笔谈。因此汉语音 节是汉字最自然、 最直接和最有效的简化形式,是汉语口语的书面语,是对汉字书面语的天然 地压缩和简化。 汉字书面语只是汉语口语的补充和发展,从来都没有取代汉语口语,所以汉语 音节才是汉字的基本信息,而汉语表音符号是汉语音节的分解。没有充分地利用汉语表音符号 和数码,尤其没有使用数码输入简码,是至今都没有彻底解决汉字编码输入难题的根本原因。 技术解决方案  If you can talk face to face in a face-to-face conversation, no one is willing to use a low-intensity and complicated pen. Therefore, the Chinese syllable is the most natural, direct and effective simplified form of Chinese characters. It is a written language of spoken Chinese and is a natural compression and simplification of written Chinese characters. Chinese written words are only the supplement and development of Chinese spoken language. They have never replaced Chinese spoken language. Therefore, Chinese syllables are the basic information of Chinese characters, while Chinese phonetic symbols are the decomposition of Chinese syllables. Not fully utilizing Chinese phonetic symbols and digital, especially without using digital input short codes, is the fundamental reason why the problem of Chinese character encoding and input has not been completely solved so far. Technical solution
本发明的主要目的,是克服现有技术的诸多不足,把字符编码附加序号的数序重码输入方 法,改进为字符编码附加数序码元的数序简码输入方法,在数码行指定并且提示而且可以直接 输入更多的简码,彻底解决简码很少并且需要补加空格才能输入的难题。  The main object of the present invention is to overcome the deficiencies of the prior art, and to improve the number-sequence code input method of the character code-added serial number to the number-sequence code input method of the character code-added number-sequence symbol, and specify and prompt in the digital line. Moreover, you can directly input more short codes and completely solve the problem that the short code is rare and you need to add spaces to input.
本发明的又一目的,是充分地利用字符或码元的行与列对应关系,以及手指击键的效率差 异,设计更有规律的字符或码元的布局,以便更简洁地合并每列字符键所指定的字根、 笔画等 码元,以及每列及每个字符键所指定的介韵母,使字符或码元的布局更合理、 更容易记忆。  A further object of the present invention is to make full use of the row-column correspondence of characters or symbols, and the difference in efficiency of fingerstrokes, to design a more regular character or symbol layout, so as to more succinctly merge each column of characters. The roots, strokes, and other symbols specified by the key, and the finals specified by each column and each character key make the layout of characters or symbols more reasonable and easier to remember.
本发明的主要目的是基于这样的原理实现的:依据所述键盘手指击键的斜列或正列指法, 每一列字符键所指定的字符或码元,也指定在同指击键的数码键上;每个数码键所指定的字符 或码元称作数码码元,依次按数序排列组成数序码元;和 /或依据数码输入效率和数码专用码 元的实用频度,在数码行直接指定数码专用的数序码元;从数序码元中分离出来,专门用于指 定简码的数序码元的子集,也称作数序码元;从而把数码作为所输入编码的附加编码,以编码 方法在数码行指定简码,并且依据数码与数序码元的对应关系,使用数码提示并且可以直接输 入更多的简码;进一步地把 "五笔字型"码元和 /或汉语表音符号码元,依据其行与列的相互对 应关系,更有规律地分别指定在键盘上,以便更容易记忆和更高效率地输入汉字词语。 The main object of the present invention is achieved based on the principle that according to the oblique or positive fingering of the keyboard fingerstroke, the character or symbol specified by each column of character keys is also assigned to the digital key of the same fingerstroke key. The character or symbol specified by each digital key is called a digital symbol, and is sequentially arranged in a numerical order to form a sequence of symbols; and/or according to the digital input efficiency and the practical frequency of the digital dedicated symbol, in the digital line Directly assigning digital-specific digital sequential symbols; separated from the digital sequential symbols, specifically used to specify a subset of short-coded digital-sequence symbols, also referred to as digital-sequence symbols; thus using the digital as the input code Additional coding, specifying the short code in the digital line by the encoding method, and using the digital prompt according to the correspondence between the digital and the digital sequential symbol, and directly inputting more short codes; further putting the "five-stroke type" symbol and / Or Chinese phonetic symbol symbols, according to their row and column mutual It should be more regularly assigned to the keyboard, so that it is easier to remember and input Chinese characters more efficiently.
具体的技术方案包括下列步骤:  The specific technical solution includes the following steps:
1、 一种数序码元键盘及其信息输入方法,目标字符为汉字的读音音节符号、 单字、 词、 词组或语句,或汉字与各种字符的任意组合;  1. A digital sequential symbol keyboard and an information input method thereof, wherein the target character is a syllable syllable symbol, a single word, a word, a phrase or a sentence of a Chinese character, or any combination of a Chinese character and various characters;
对所要输入的目标字符集进行编码,所用的编码信息单元称作码元,指定在任意一个字母 键盘或虚拟字母键盘的字符键上称作码元布局,参与编码的字符键所标注的字符称作编码字 符,所有编码字符的键位组成字符键区;数码行的字符 1、 2、 3 0、 "-"和 "="统称为 数码,其排序称作数序;通过码元的关联作用建立编码字符-目标字符映射库即码表;  Encoding the target character set to be input, the coding information unit used is called a symbol, and is designated as a symbol layout on the character key of any alphabet keyboard or virtual alphabet keyboard, and the character name marked by the character key participating in the encoding As a coded character, the keys of all coded characters constitute the character keypad; the characters of the digital line 1, 2, 3 0, "-" and "=" are collectively referred to as numbers, and the ordering is called number order; through the association of symbols Establish a coded character-target character mapping library, that is, a code table;
统计所有目标字符集的实用频度,计算各种码元布局总的时间当量数据进行比较;如果一 个码元指定在字形或读音相同或相近的编码字符上,对于总的输入效率的影响可以忽略则优 先指定,否则就要变更或修饰这个码元的符号,或变更这个编码字符的位置;最终选择出输入 效率较高并且好学易记的码元布局;  The practical frequency of all target character sets is counted, and the total time equivalent data of various symbol layouts is calculated for comparison; if one symbol is specified on the same or similar coded characters of glyph or pronunciation, the influence on the total input efficiency can be ignored. Then specify the priority, otherwise it is necessary to change or modify the symbol of the symbol, or change the position of the coded character; finally select the symbol layout with high input efficiency and easy to learn and remember;
具体的汉字词语或其读音音节符号的编码输入过程,是相同或不同的输入模式下,前后接 续的多个进程所组成,每个进程包括下列步骤:  The encoding input process of specific Chinese words or their pronunciation syllables is composed of multiple processes in the same or different input modes, and each process includes the following steps:
接收用户通过所用键盘输入的编码字符信息,提示所输入的字符、 码元或候选目标字符; 根据所输入编码字符,从编码字符-目标字符映射库即码表中査找出相应的目标字符集; 将所述目标字符集显示在显示器上,和 /或把目标字符的读音通过语音输出的设备播放; 其特征如下所述:  Receiving coded character information input by the user through the keyboard used, prompting the input character, symbol or candidate target character; according to the input coded character, searching for the corresponding target character set from the coded character-target character mapping library, that is, the code table Displaying the target character set on the display, and/or playing the target character's pronunciation through a voice output device; the features are as follows:
依据所述键盘手指击键的斜列或正列指法,每一列字符键所指定的字符或码元,也指定在 同指击键的数码键上;每个数码键所指定的字符或码元称作数码码元,依次按数序排列组成数 序码元;和 /或依据数码输入效率和数码专用码元的实用频度,在数码行直接指定数码专用的 数序码元;从数序码元中分离出来,专门用于指定简码的、 数序码元的子集,也简称数序码元; 指定至少一种数序码元的所述键盘称作数序码元键盘,包括斜列和正列两种指法的数序 码元键盘;从而在输入第一个编码字符之后,使数码成为非首键且仅在编码末尾处才有效的编 码字符,代表数序码元按数序依次参与编码,作为此前所输入编码的附加编码而指定简码; 在字符键区每输入一个编码字符,所输入的字符编码,附加待输入的数序码元,组成字符 编码附加数序码元的数序编码,所对应的数序目标字符集中,选取实用频度较高的一组或多 组、 每组最多 12个数序目标字符,在数码行指定并且提示所输入字符编码的一组或多组、 每 组最多 12个按数序排列的简码,称作数序简码,该过程称作依据所输入编码附加数序码元而 指定数序简码;采用下述的字符编码附加数序码元的数序简码输入方法:  According to the oblique column or the positive column fingering of the keyboard fingerstroke, the character or symbol specified by each column of character keys is also specified on the digital key of the same fingerstroke key; the character or symbol specified by each digit key The digital symbol is sequentially arranged in a numerical order to form a sequence of symbols; and/or the digital dedicated digital sequence symbol is directly specified in the digital line according to the digital input efficiency and the practical frequency of the digital dedicated symbol; Separated from the symbol, specifically for specifying a short code, a subset of the sequence of symbols, also referred to as a sequence of symbols; the keyboard specifying at least one number of symbols is referred to as a numbered symbol keyboard, including The numbered symbol keyboard of the two fingerings of the oblique column and the positive column; thus, after inputting the first coded character, the coded character that makes the digital non-first key and only valid at the end of the code represents the order of the numbered symbols. Participate in the code in turn, specify the short code as the additional code of the previously input code; input one code character in the character keypad, input the character code, add the sequence code symbol to be input, and form the character code additional sequence code symbol Number Coding, corresponding to the sequence of the target character set, select one or more groups with higher practical frequency, up to 12 number of target characters per group, specify one or more groups of the input character codes in the digital line Each group of up to 12 short codes arranged in numerical order, called a sequence short code, the process is called specifying a sequence short code according to the input code additional number sequence symbol; using the following character encoding additional number order Number sequence short code input method of symbol:
在字符键区输入首个编码字符,所输入的首字符编码附加待输入的数序码元,组成首字符 编码附加数序码元的数序编码,所对应的数序目标字符集中,选取实用频度较高的一组或多 组、每组最多 12个数序目标字符,在数码行指定并且提示首字符的一组或多组数序简码,称作 一级数序简码,下次击键使用待输入数序码元的任一数码,直接输入其简码而结束该进程,否 则输入下一个编码字符;  Entering the first coded character in the character keypad, the first character code input is added to the number sequence symbol to be input, and the number sequence code of the first character code additional sequence code symbol is formed, and the corresponding number order target character set is selected, and the utility is selected. One or more groups of higher frequency, each group of up to 12 number of sequence target characters, one or more sets of sequence short codes specified in the digital line and prompting the first character, called first-order digital short code, under The second keystroke uses any number of digits to be input, directly enters its short code to end the process, otherwise enters the next coded character;
在字符键区输入第 2个编码字符之后,所输入双字符编码附加待输入的数序码元,组成双 字符编码附加数序码元的数序编码,所对应的数序目标字符集中,选取实用频度较高的一组或 多组、 每组最多 12个数序目标字符,在数码行指定并且提示双字符编码的一组或多组数序简 码,称作二级数序简码,下次击键使用待输入数序码元的任一数码,直接输入其简码而结束该 进程,否则输入下一个编码字符;  After the second coded character is input in the character keypad, the input two-character code is added to the number sequence symbol to be input, and the number sequence code of the two-character coded additional number sequence symbol is formed, and the corresponding digital sequence target character set is selected. One or more groups of higher frequency of practicality, up to 12 number of sequence target characters per group, one or more sets of sequence short codes specified in the digital line and prompting two-character encoding, called second order short code The next keystroke uses any number of digits to be input, directly enters its shortcode and ends the process, otherwise enters the next encoded character;
依次类推,在字符键区输入第 N个编码字符之后, N为逐个递增的正整数,所输入的 N个字 符的编码附加待输入的数序码元,组成 N个字符编码附加数序码元的数序编码,所对应的数序 目标字符集中,选取实用频度较高的一组或多组、每组最多 12个数序目标字符,在数码行指定 并且提示 N个字符编码的一组或多组数序简码,称作 N级数序简码,下次击键使用待输入数序 码元的任一数码,直接输入其简码而结束该进程,否则输入下一个编码字符;直至达到最大输 入码长,或输入标点、 空格等非编码字符或回车而结束该进程; And so on, after inputting the Nth coded character in the character keypad, N is a positive integer that is incremented one by one, and the input N words The code of the character is added to the sequence code symbol to be input, and the number sequence code of the N character code additional sequence code symbol is composed, and the corresponding number of sequence target character sets are selected, and one or more groups with a higher practical frequency are selected. A group of up to 12 number of sequence target characters, one or more sets of sequence short codes specified in the digital line and prompted by N characters, called N-order number sequence short codes, and the next keystrokes to use the number sequence symbols to be input Any of the numbers, directly enter the short code to end the process, otherwise enter the next coded character; until the maximum input code length is reached, or enter non-coded characters such as punctuation, spaces, or carriage return to end the process;
或者进一步地,所输入字符编码不能附加数序码元的重码,依据此前击键的手指与待输入 数码的手指、 组合击键效率的降序,依次指定其实用频度降序的重码。  Or further, the input character code cannot add the weight code of the sequence code symbol, and the weight code of the descending order of the practical frequency is sequentially designated according to the descending order of the finger of the previous keystroke and the finger to be input digital and the combination keystroke efficiency.
2、 按照技术方案 1所述的数序码元键盘及其信息输入方法,使用任意一种形码汉字编码 输入法,其特征是,依据所输入编码附加数序码元而指定数序简码,简化为在每一列待输入字 符的高一级别现有简码中选择简码,按数序组成本级别的数序简码,如下所述:  2. According to the digital sequence symbol keyboard and the information input method thereof according to the technical scheme 1, any one of the shape code Chinese character encoding input methods is used, which is characterized in that the number sequence short code is specified according to the input code added sequence number symbol. Simplified to select a short code in the existing short code of the higher level of each column to be input characters, and form the sequence short code of the level in numerical order, as follows:
输入任意一个编码字符之后,选择每一列待输入字符的二级简码之一,指定为每个同指击 键数码的简码,按数序组成一级数序简码;  After inputting any one of the coded characters, one of the two-level short codes of each character to be input is selected, and the short code of each of the same fingerstroke numbers is designated, and the first-order digital short code is composed in numerical order;
输入任意 2个编码字符之后,选择每一列待输入字符的三级简码之一,指定为每个同指击 键数码的简码,按数序组成二级数序简码;  After inputting any two coded characters, one of the three-level short codes of each character to be input is selected, and each short code of the same fingerstroke number is designated, and the second-order short code is composed by number order;
依次类推,输入任意 N个编码字符之后, N为逐个递增的正整数,选择每一列待输入字符的 N+1级简码之一,指定为每个同指击键数码的简码,按数序组成 N级数序简码,直至达到所设定 的最大输入码长为止。  By analogy, after inputting any N coded characters, N is a positive integer incrementing one by one, and selecting one of the N+1 level short codes of each character to be input, designating each short code of the same fingerstroke key, by number The sequence forms an N-order number shortcode until the set maximum input code length is reached.
3、 按照技术方案 1或 2所述的数序码元键盘及其信息输入方法,变更 "五笔字型" "86 版"的简体、 或 "98版"的简体或繁体的字根码元布局,其特征如下所述:  3. According to the digital sequence symbol keyboard and the information input method thereof according to the technical scheme 1 or 2, the simplified or traditional root symbol layout of the "five-character type" "86 version" is simplified, or the "98 version" is changed. , its characteristics are as follows:
靠近左侧的 10列字符键划分为列数对等的左区和右区,每个区内,字根的首笔画相同的字 根码元、指定在同一列的字符键上,字根的次笔画相同的字根码元、指定在同一行的字符键上, 称作列笔画字根码元布局,包括斜列和正列指法的列笔画字根码元布局;同一列字符键的字根 码元也指定在同指击键的数码键上,组成斜列或正列指法的数序字根码元,或进一步地简化为 字根的首笔画和次笔画组成的数序笔画码元;除字根码元的布局,及新增的数序字根码元和数 序笔画码元外,保留 "五笔字型"原有的简体或繁体的字词编码输入方法,也可补加空格输入 原有简码,如果采用正列指法还可进一步地补加数码 1而输入原有简码;  The 10-column character keys on the left side are divided into the left and right areas of the number of columns, and in each area, the first stroke of the root is the same as the character of the same column, and the root of the character is specified. The same root symbol of the second stroke, specified on the character key of the same line, is called the column stroke root symbol layout, including the column stroke root symbol layout of the oblique column and the positive column fingering; the root of the same column character key The symbol element is also specified on the digital key of the same fingerstroke key, and constitutes the number sequence root symbol of the oblique column or the positive column fingering, or is further reduced to the number sequence stroke symbol composed of the first stroke and the second stroke of the radical; In addition to the layout of the root symbol, and the newly added numbered root symbol and numbered stroke symbol, the original "five-stroke type" original simplified or traditional word encoding input method is retained, and spaces can also be added. Input the original short code, if using the positive index fingering, you can further add the number 1 and input the original short code;
每输入一个编码字符,所输入的字符编码,附加待输入的数序字根码元、或数序笔画码元, 所对应的数序目标汉字中,选取实用频度较高的一组或多组、每组最多 12个数序的目标汉字, 在数码行指定并提示 1、 2、 3、 4或 5字符编码的一组或多组数序简码字;下次击键使用待输 入数序字根码元或数序笔画码元的任一数码,直接输入其简码字而结束该进程;否则,输入下 一个编码字符;直至达到最大输入码长,或输入标点、空格等非编码字符或回车而结束该进程。  Each time a coded character is input, the input character code is added, the number of the sequence word root symbol to be input, or the number of sequenced stroke symbols is added, and the corresponding number of target target Chinese characters is selected, or a group with a higher practical frequency is selected. Group, up to 12 target Chinese characters in each group, specify one or more sets of numbered short code words encoded in 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 characters in the digital line; use the number to be entered in the next keystroke Any digit of the radical root symbol or the digital sequential stroke symbol, directly inputting its short codeword to end the process; otherwise, input the next encoded character; until the maximum input code length is reached, or input non-coding such as punctuation, space, etc. End the process with a character or a carriage return.
4、 按照技术方案 1所述的数序码元键盘及其信息输入方法,使用全拼、 简拼或双拼的任 意一种汉字编码输入方法,其特征如下所述:  4. According to the digital sequence symbol keyboard and the information input method thereof according to the technical scheme 1, any Chinese character code input method using full spelling, simple spelling or double spelling is used, and the characteristics are as follows:
阴平、 阳平、 上声和去声的声调符号,针对斜列指法依次指定在 4、 5、 6、 7的数码键上, 或针对正列指法依次指定在 5、 6、 7、 8的数码键上,统称为数序单声调;  Yinping, Yangping, Shangsheng and Detachment tones, which are assigned to the numeric keys of 4, 5, 6, or 7 for the oblique column fingering, or the numeric keys of 5, 6, 7, and 8 for the positive column fingering. Above, collectively referred to as a single-order single tone;
或者去声、 阴平、 阳平和上声的声调符号,分别指定在食指、 中指、 无名指和小指依次击 键的、 左手和右手两组数码键上;或进一步地把所有声调合并为零声调,分别指定在输入效率 较高的、 左手和右手的两个数码键上;指定零声调与否的两种双声调,统称为数序双声调; 依据汉字词语的读音,采用下述的任意一种字符编码附加数序码元的数序简码输入方法: 输入任一声介韵编码之后,附加待输入的数序单声调,组成数序的声介韵调,所对应的数 序目标汉字中,选取实用频度较高的一组或多组,每组最多 6个单字或单字词,分别指定在数 序单声调的数码键上;并且选取相同声介韵的、 实用频度较高的其它单字或单字词,指定在其 它数码键上;在数码行指定并且提示一组或多组数序的音节简码字,下次击键使用数序单声调 的任一数码、 直接输入其音节简码字,或使用其它任一数码、 输入所提示的音节简码字,从而 结束该进程,称作声介韵编码附加数序单声调的数序简码字输入模式; Or the tone symbols of the sound, the Yinping, the Yangping and the upper sound are respectively designated on the left, right and right hand digital keys of the index finger, the middle finger, the ring finger and the little finger; or further all the tones are combined into zero tones, respectively Specified on two digital keys with high input efficiency, left-hand and right-hand; two double tones that specify zero tonality or not, collectively referred to as digital-sequence dual-tone; according to the pronunciation of Chinese words, any one of the following character codes is used. The method of inputting the sequence number short code of the additional number sequence symbol: After inputting any sound medium coding, the number sequence tones to be input are added, and the sound sequence of the sequence is composed, and the corresponding numerical order target Chinese characters are selected. One or more groups with a high frequency, each group of up to 6 words or words, respectively specified in the number On the digital key of the single tone; and select other words or words with the same frequency and higher practical frequency, which are specified on other digital keys; specify and prompt one or more sets of numbers in the digital line. Syllable short code word, the next keystroke uses any number of single-order single tone, directly input its syllable short code word, or use any other digital, input the syllabic short code word prompted, thus ending the process, called Acoustic prime code encoding additional sequence-single-tone digital sequence short code word input mode;
或者,输入任一声介韵编码之后,附加待输入的数序双声调,组成两组数序的声介韵调;一 组数序声调指定并且提示所述的数序音节简码字,另一组数序声调指定并且提示数序的音节 符号;下次击键使用数序双声调的任一数码,直接输入其音节简码字或音节符号而结束该进程; 或进一步地提示所输入音节符号的一组或多组、 每组最多 12个实用频度较高的同音字,再一 次击键使用任一数码、输入所提示的同音字再结束该进程,统称为声介韵编码附加数序双声调 的数序简码音字输入模式;  Alternatively, after inputting any of the phonological codes, the sequenced double tones to be input are added to form two sets of sequenced audio tones; a set of sequenced tones specifies and prompts the sequenced syllables, and the other The group number tone specifies and prompts the syllable symbol of the sequence; the next keystroke uses any number of the sequenced double tone, directly inputs its syllable short code word or syllable symbol to end the process; or further prompts the input syllable symbol One or more groups, each group of up to 12 homophonic words with higher practical frequency. Once again, use any number and input the homophones prompted to end the process. Double-tone digital sequence short code input mode;
如果限定最多输入一个字的编码,则结束该进程,到此为止的字符编码附加数序码元的数 序简码输入方法,统称为字符编码附加数序声调的数序简码音字输入方法;  If the encoding of the maximum input of one word is limited, the process ends, and the number encoding short code input method of the character encoding additional number sequential symbol is used, which is collectively referred to as the numerical code short-order short-coded short-coded short-word input method;
或进一步地,输入任意两个声介韵编码之后,所输入的双声介韵视为双音词,无论是否重 码,每个双音词及其首字、尾字依次组成词字序列;依据此前击键的手指与待输入数码的手指、 组合击键效率的降序,在数码行依次指定一组或多组、 总的实用频度降序的词字序列;使用所 提示的数码输入任一双音词、或其任一单字而结束该进程,称作双声介韵编码附加序号的数序 简码词字输入模式;  Or further, after inputting any two sounds and rhymes, the input double-syllables are regarded as two-syllable words, and whether or not they are re-coded, each double-syllable word and its first and last words form a sequence of word words; The keystroke finger and the finger to be input digital, the descending order of the combined keystroke efficiency, in the digital line, sequentially specify one or more groups, the total practical frequency descending word sequence; use the prompted digital input any two-syllable word Ending the process, or any of its words, is called a double-speech coded additional sequence number-simplified codeword word input mode;
如果限定最多输入两个字的编码,则结束该进程,到此为止的字符编码附加数序码元的数 序简码输入方法,统称为字符编码附加数序声调的数序简码字词输入方法。  If the encoding of the maximum input of two words is limited, the process ends, and the character encoding short-coded short code input method of the character encoding additional number-sequence symbol up to this point is collectively referred to as the character-coded short-coded short word input of the character encoding additional sequenced tone. method.
5、 按照技术方案 1所述的数序码元键盘及其信息输入方法,其特征是,依据数码输入效率 和单韵母实用频度,在数码行直接指定数序单韵母,或进一步地在基准键行或其上一行的、 同 指击键字符键上也指定单韵母称作字符单韵母;或者进一步地指定所述的数序单声调或双声 调而组成数序韵调母;采用下述的任意一种字符编码附加数序码元的数序简码输入方法:  5. The digital sequence symbol keyboard and the information input method thereof according to the technical solution 1, characterized in that, according to the digital input efficiency and the single-female practical frequency, the digital sequence line directly specifies the sequenced single final, or further in the reference. The key line or the line above the same finger key character also specifies a single final is called a character single final; or further specifies the numerical order single tone or double tone to form a sequence rhyme; Any number of character encoding additional sequence number symbols of the number order short code input method:
首次击键输入首字单声母, 211与2、 sh与 s、 ch与 c分别合并,或另行指定双声母的键位 而首次击键输入,否则击键两次输入首字双声母; The first key input enters the first word single initial, 2 11 and 2 , sh and s, ch and c respectively, or separately specify the double initial key and the first key input, otherwise the key input twice input the first double initial;
所输入的单声母或双声母的编码,附加待输入的数序单韵母,组成首字的数序声韵,每个 声韵及其声韵中包含 i、 u和 U的所有声介韵,所对应的数序目标汉字中,选取一组或多组、 每 组最多 12个实用频度较高的单字或单字词,在数码行指定并且提示一组或多组的、 数序的声 韵简码字,下次击键使用数序单韵母的任一数码,直接输入其声韵简码字而结束该进程,称作 声母编码附加数序单韵母的数序简码字输入模式;  The input of the single initial or double initial, the additional sequenced single vowel to be input, constitutes the first order of the sequence of rhymes, each of the rhymes and their rhymes contain all the sounds of i, u and U, corresponding to In the numerical order target Chinese character, select one or more groups, each group of up to 12 single words or single words with higher practical frequency, specify and prompt one or more sets of sequenced sound rhyming code words in the digital line. The next keystroke uses any number of the single-sequence single-final, directly inputting its vocoded short-coded word and ends the process, which is called the initial-coded short-coded single-final single-coded short codeword input mode;
否则,进一步地输入首字介母,从而最多击键三次输入首字声介母;附加待输入的数序单 韵母,组成首字的数序声介韵,所对应的数序目标汉字中,选取一组或多组、 每组最多 12个实 用频度较高的单字或单字词,在数码行指定并且提示一组或多组的、 数序的声介韵简码字,下 次击键使用单韵母的任一数码,直接输入其声介韵简码字而结束该进程,称作声介母编码附加 数序单韵母的数序简码字输入模式;  Otherwise, the first word mother is further input, so that the first word initial is input by a maximum of three keystrokes; the numbered single vowel to be input is added, and the number sequence sound of the first word is composed, and the corresponding numerical order target Chinese character is Select one or more groups, each group of up to 12 single words or single words with higher practical frequency, specify and prompt one or more sets of sequenced sounds in the digital line, the next hit The key uses any number of single vowels and directly inputs its vocal code to end the process, which is called the sound-coded mother-coded sequence-single-single-single-single-simplified code-word input mode;
或进一步地,使用字符单韵母的任一字符,输入首字的声介韵;采用所述的声介韵编码附 加数序单声调的数序简码字输入模式,直接输入任一音节简码字而结束该进程;或采用所述的 声介韵编码附加数序双声调的数序简码音字输入模式,直接输入任一音节简码字或音节符号 而结束该进程;或进一步地输入所输入音节符号的任一同音字,再结束该进程;  Or further, using any character of the single vowel of the character, inputting the phonological rhyme of the first word; using the vocal grammar coding to add a sequence of single-tone single-coded short code word input mode, directly input any syllable short code Terminating the process by using the word; or using the augmented rhyme coding additional number-sequence double-tone sequence-sequential short code word input mode, directly inputting any syllable short code word or syllable symbol to end the process; or further inputting Enter any homophone of the syllable symbol and end the process;
如果限定最多输入一个字的编码,则结束该进程,到此为止的字符编码附加数序码元的数 序简码输入方法,统称为声母编码附加数序韵调母的数序简码音字输入方法; 或进一步地,输入次字单声母或双声母,所输入的声介韵与声母编码,附加待输入的数序 单韵母,组成数序的声介韵与声韵,每个声介韵与声韵、 及其声韵中包含1、 u和 U的所有声介 韵与声介韵,所对应的数序目标双音词中,选取一组或多组、每组最多 12个实用频度较高的双 音词,在数码行指定并且提示一组或多组的、 数序的声介韵与声韵简码双音词,下次击键使用 次字单韵母的任一数码,直接输入其简码双音词而结束该进程,称作声介韵与声母编码附加数 序单韵母的数序简码词输入模式; If the encoding of the maximum input of one word is limited, the process ends, and the number encoding short code input method of the character encoding additional number sequential symbol is used, which is collectively referred to as the initial sequence of the initials. method; Or further, input a single word initial or double initial, the input sound and the initial code, add the sequenced single vowel to be input, form the sequence of the sound and rhyme, each sound and rhyme, And its rhyme contains all the sounds and sounds of 1, u and U, corresponding to the number of target two-syllable words, select one or more groups, each group of up to 12 pairs with higher practical frequency The syllables are specified in the digital line and suggest one or more sets of sequenced sounds and vowels. The next time you use the key of the second vowel, you can directly enter the short code. Ending the process with a syllable, called the phonological and initial consonant coded sequenced single vowel, the numbered short code word input mode;
否则,输入次字介母,从而输入声介韵与声介母,附加待输入的数序单韵母,组成数序的声 介韵与声介韵,所对应的数序目标双音词中,选取一组或多组实用频度较高的双音词,在数码 行指定并且提示一组或多组的、数序的声介韵与声介韵简码双音词,下次击键使用次字单韵母 的任一数码,直接输入其简码双音词而结束该进程,称作声介韵与声介母编码附加数序单韵母 的数序简码词输入模式;  Otherwise, input the second word mother, so as to input the sound and rhyme, and add the sequenced single vowel to be input, and form the sequence of the sound and the rhyme, corresponding to the sequence of the target two-syllable words, Select one or more sets of two-syllable words with higher frequency of practice, and specify and prompt one or more sets of sounds and sounds of the sequence and the two-syllable words in the digital line. The next keystroke is used. Any number of single-single vowels, directly inputting its short-coded double-syllables and ending the process, called the sound-synchronized and the syllabic code-added sequence-single-single-single-order syllabic word input mode;
或者进一步地,使用字符单韵母的任一字符,输入声介韵与声介韵,采用所述的双声介韵 编码附加序号的数序简码词字输入模式,再使用任一数码输入所提示的双音词、或其任一单字 而结束该进程;  Or further, using any character of the single vowel of the character, inputting the sound and rhyme, and using the double-voiced rhyme coding to add the sequence number of the short code word input mode, and then using any digital input to prompt The two-syllable word, or any of its words, ends the process;
如果限定最多输入两个字的编码,则结束该进程,到此为止的字符编码附加数序码元的数 序简码输入方法,统称为声母编码附加数序韵调母的数序简码字词输入方法。  If the encoding of the maximum input of two words is limited, the process ends, and the number encoding short code input method of the character encoding additional number sequential symbol is used, which is collectively referred to as the initial coded short code word of the initials. Word input method.
6、 按照技术方案 1所述的数序码元键盘及其信息输入方法,其特征是,一律使用 V代替 "hu",双声母组合输入;依据数码输入效率和单韵母实用频度,在数码行直接指定数序单韵 母,或进一步地在基准键行或其上一行的、 同指击键字符键上也指定单韵母称作字符单韵母; 或者进一步地指定数序单声调或双声调而组成数序韵调母;采用下述的任意一种字符编码附 加数序码元的数序简码输入方法:  6. The digital sequence symbol keyboard and the information input method thereof according to the technical scheme 1 are characterized in that V is used instead of "hu", and the double initial combination input; according to the digital input efficiency and the single vowel practical frequency, in the digital The line directly specifies the sequence single vowel, or further specifies the single vowel as the character single vowel on the same keystroke line or the same finger line character key; or further specifies the number order single tone or double tone The composition of the sequence rhyme adjustment; using any of the following character encoding additional numerical sequence code number short code input method:
首次击键输入首字单声母,附加待输入的数序单韵母,组成首字的数序声韵,每个声韵及 其声韵中包含 i、 u、 U、 h和 hu或 v的所有声介韵,所对应的数序目标汉字中,选取一组或多 组、 每组最多 12个实用频度较高的单字或单字词,在数码行指定并且提示一组或多组的、 数 序的声韵简码字,下次击键使用数序单韵母的任一数码,直接输入其声韵简码字而结束该进程, 称作单声母编码附加数序单韵母的数序简码字输入模式;  The first keystroke enters the first word single initial, and the numbered single vowel to be input is added to form the first-order numerical sequence rhyme. Each sound and its rhyme contains all the sounds of i, u, U, h and hu or v. Among the corresponding numerical target Chinese characters, one or more groups, each group of up to 12 single words or single words with higher practical frequency, are specified in the digital line and suggest one or more groups, numerical order Acoustic rhyme short code word, the next keystroke uses any number of the single-sequence single-final, directly input its rhyme short-character word and end the process, called the mono-acoustic coding additional number-single-single-single-sequence short-coded word input mode;
否则,进一步地输入首字单介母,从而最多击键两次输入首字的声介母;附加待输入的数 序单韵母,组成首字的数序声介韵,所对应的数序目标汉字中,选取一组或多组、 每组最多 12 个实用频度较高的单字或单字词,在数码行指定并且提示一组或多组的、数序的声介韵简码字, 下次击键使用单韵母的任一数码,直接输入其声介韵简码字而结束该进程,称作单声介母编码 附加数序单韵母的数序简码字输入模式;  Otherwise, the first word single mediator is further input, so that the voice initials of the first word are input twice at most; the numbered single vowels to be input are added, and the number sequence sound of the first word is composed, and the corresponding numerical order target In Chinese characters, select one or more groups, each group of up to 12 single words or single words with higher practical frequency, and specify and prompt one or more sets of sequenced sound simplification code words in the digital line. The next keystroke uses any number of single vowels, directly inputting its syllabic short codeword and ending the process, which is called the monophonic coded additional sequenced single vowel.
或者进一步地,使用字符单韵母的任一字符,输入首字的声介韵;采用所述的声介韵编码 附加数序单声调的数序简码字输入模式,直接输入任一音节简码字而结束该进程;或采用所述 的声介韵编码附加数序双声调的数序简码音字输入模式,直接输入任一音节简码字或音节符 号而结束该进程;或进一步地输入所输入音节符号的任一同音字,再结束该进程;  Or further, using any character of the single vowel of the character, inputting the phonological rhyme of the first word; using the vocal grammar coding to add the number-single-single-single-sequential short code word input mode, directly inputting any syllable short code Terminating the process by using the word; or using the augmented rhyme coding additional number-sequence double-tone sequence-sequential short code word input mode, directly inputting any syllable short code word or syllable symbol to end the process; or further inputting Enter any homophone of the syllable symbol and end the process;
如果限定最多输入一个字的编码,则结束该进程,到此为止的字符编码附加数序码元的数 序简码输入方法,统称为单声介母编码附加数序韵调母的数序简码音字输入方法;  If the encoding of the maximum input of one word is limited, the process ends, and the number encoding short code input method of the character encoding additional number sequential symbol is used, which is collectively referred to as the number sequence of the monogram-prefixed numbered sequence. Code word input method;
或进一步地输入次字单声母,所输入的声介韵与声母编码,附加待输入的数序单韵母,组 成数序的声介韵与声韵,每个声介韵与声韵、 及其声韵中包含^ u、 U、 h和 hu或 v的所有 声介韵与声介韵,所对应的数序目标双音词中,选取一组或多组、每组最多 12个实用频度较高 的双音词,在数码行指定并且提示一组或多组的、 数序的声介韵与声韵简码双音词,下次击键 使用次字单韵母的任一数码,直接输入其简码双音词而结束该进程,称作单声介韵与单声母编 码附加数序单韵母的数序简码词输入模式; Or further input the sub-word initials, the input sound and the initial code, add the sequence-single vowel to be input, form the sequence of the sound and rhyme, each sound and rhyme, and its rhyme Including all the sounds and sounds of ^ u, U, h and hu or v, corresponding to the sequenced target two-syllable words, one or more groups are selected, and each group has a maximum of 12 practical frequencies. Two-syllable words, specified in the digital line and prompting one or more sets of, the sequence of the sound and the rhyme short coded two-syllable words, the next keystroke Using any digit of the second-character single-final, directly inputting its short-coded double-syllables and ending the process, which is called the monophonic mero-symbol and the mono-acoustic encoding, the number-sequence-single-single-single-single-simplified-word input mode;
否则,输入次字单介母,从而输入声介韵与声介母,附加待输入的数序单韵母,组成数序的 声介韵与声介韵,所对应的数序目标双音词中,选取一组或多组、每组最多 12个实用频度较高 的双音词,在数码行指定并且提示一组或多组的、 数序的声介韵与声介韵简码双音词,下次击 键使用次字单韵母的任一数码,直接输入其简码双音词而结束该进程,称作单声介韵与单声介 母编码附加数序单韵母的数序简码词输入模式;  Otherwise, input the sub-word single mediator, so as to input the sound and rhyme, and add the sequence-single vowel to be input, and form the sequence of the sound and the rhyme, corresponding to the sequence of the target two-syllable words. Select one or more groups, each group of up to 12 two-syllable words with higher practical frequency, specify and prompt one or more groups of digital sounds and sounds in the digital line. Word, the next keystroke uses any digit of the second-character single-final, directly enters its short-coded double-syllable and ends the process, which is called the monophonic and mono-media coding. Codeword input mode;
或者进一步地,使用字符单韵母任一字符,输入声介韵与声介韵,采用所述的双声介韵编 码附加序号的数序简码词字输入模式,再使用任一数码输入所提示的双音词、或其任一单字而 结束该进程;  Or further, using any character of the character single vowel, inputting the sound and the rhyme, using the double-sounding rhyme coding to add the sequence number of the short-coded word-word input mode, and then using any digital input to prompt End the process with a two-syllable word, or any of its words;
如果限定最多输入两个字的编码,则结束该进程,到此为止的字符编码附加数序码元的数 序简码输入方法,统称为单声介母编码附加数序韵调母的数序简码字词输入方法。  If the encoding of the maximum input of two words is limited, the process ends, and the number encoding method of the character encoding additional number sequential symbols of the character encoding so far is collectively referred to as the order of the number of the monosyllabic coded sequence Shortcode word input method.
7、 按照技术方案 1所述的数序码元键盘及其信息输入方法,单声母指定在同字形的字母 键上,其特征是,原则上,介母相同的介韵母指定在同一行字符键上,单韵母相同的介韵母指 定在同一列字符键上,个别介韵母可以例外;单独做韵母的介母 i、 u和 U统称为零韵母,分别 指定在单韵母 er的同列字符键上; 2}!与2、 811与8、 ch与 c分别合并,或另行指定双声母键 位;每一列字符键所指定的介韵母,合并为不区分介母的单韵母,分别指定在同指击键的数码 键上组成数序单韵母,或者进一步地指定所述的数序单声调或双声调而组成数序韵调母;采用 下述的任意一种字符编码附加数序码元的数序简码输入方法: 7. According to the digital sequential symbol keyboard and the information input method thereof according to the first aspect, the single initial is assigned to the alphabetic key of the same glyph, and the feature is that, in principle, the same final vowel of the mediator is specified in the same line of character keys. On the same, the single vowels of the same single vowel are assigned to the same column of character keys, and the individual vowels can be exceptional; the mesons of the vowels alone, i, u and U are collectively referred to as zero vowels, which are respectively assigned to the same character keys of the single final er ; 2 }! and 2 , 811 and 8 , ch and c are respectively combined, or separately specify the double initial key; the memorized prime specified by each column of character keys is merged into a single final with no mediation, respectively specified in the same fingering The numeric key of the key constitutes a sequence single vowel, or further specifies the numerical order single tone or double tone to form a numerical sequence vowel; the sequence of the additional numbered symbols is encoded by any of the following characters Shortcode input method:
首次击键输入首字的单或双声母,釆用所述的声母编码附加数序单韵母的数序简码字输 入模式,直接输入任一声韵简码字而结束该进程;  The first keystroke inputs the single or double initials of the first word, and uses the initial code of the initial coded single-final single-coded short code word input mode, and directly inputs any of the abbreviated short code words to end the process;
否则,再次击键输入首字的介韵母,采用所述的声介韵编码附加数序单声调的数序简码字 输入模式,直接输入任一音节简码字而结束该进程;或采用所述的声介韵编码附加数序双声调 的数序简码音字输入模式,直接输入任一音节简码字或音节符号而结束该进程;或进一步地输 入所输入音节符号的任一同音字再结束该进程;  Otherwise, press the key again to input the prime vowel of the first word, use the sound phonological code to add the number-single-single-sequence number-simplified short code word input mode, directly input any syllable short code word to end the process; The phonological coding code is a sequence-simplified syllabic input mode that adds a sequence of two-tones, directly inputting any syllable short code word or syllable symbol to end the process; or further inputting any homophone of the input syllable symbol and ending The process;
如果限定最大输入码长为 2,则结束该进程,到此为止的字符编码附加数序码元的数序简 码输入方法,统称为双拼编码附加数序韵调母的数序简码音字输入方法;  If the maximum input code length is limited to 2, the process ends, and the character encoding additional number sequence code input method of the character code added thereto is collectively referred to as a double-splicing code-added number-sequence-to-speech code sequence-simplified code word Input method
或进一步地,单次击键输入次字单或双声母,采用所述的声介韵与声母编码附加数序单韵 母的数序简码词输入模式,直接输入任一简码双音词而结束该进程;  Or further, inputting a single word or a double initial with a single keystroke, and directly inputting any short coded double word by using the sound sequence and the initial encoding of the numbered single finals of the initials. End the process;
否则,单次击键输入次字的介韵母,采用所述的双声介韵编码附加序号的数序简码词字输 入模式,输入所提示的任一简码双音词、 或其任一单字而结束该进程;  Otherwise, a single keystroke enters the prime vowel of the second word, and uses the double-tone vocoding to encode the numbered short code word input mode of the additional number, and inputs any short coded double word, or any of its words. End the process;
或者进一步地,如果所输入的第 1、 2个编码字符,和 /或第 3、 4个编码字符,都不是有效 的声介韵,则视为多音词,依次使用每个字的声母或补加末字的介韵母编码输入;  Or further, if the input 1st, 2nd coded characters, and/or the 3rd and 4th coded characters are not valid sounds, they are regarded as multi-syllables, and the initials of each word are used in turn or Adding the final vowel coding input of the last word;
如果限定最大输入码长为 4,则结束该进程,到此为止的字符编码附加数序码元的数序简 码输入方法,统称为双拼编码附加数序韵调母的数序简码字词输入方法。  If the maximum input code length is limited to 4, the process ends, and the character encoding additional number sequence code input method of the character code added to the end of the process is collectively referred to as the double-splicing code-added number-sequence-to-speech number-order short code word. Word input method.
8、按照技术方案 7所述的数序码元键盘及其信息输入方法,其特征是,在 "QWERTY"键盘 上指定介韵母,基准键上一行依次为: a, ang, e, er, an, en, eng, au, eu, ei, ai;基准键一行依次 为: ia, iang, ie, i, ian, ien, ieng, iau, ieu,以及例夕卜的 uei, uai; 基准键的下一行依次为: ua, uang, ue (ue) , u, uan (iian) , uen (uen) , ueng (iieng),括号内符号可以省略; zh与 z、 811与3、 ch与 c分别合并,或者双声母 Zh、 Sh、 Ch分别指定在单声母之外的字符键上,或依 次指定在 ", "、 " . "和 "/"字符键上;或者把汉语音母符号替换为汉语拼音符号或注音符号。 9、 按照技术方案 8所述的数序码元键盘及其信息输入方法,其特征是,所述的 "QWERTY" 键盘,字母 Q和 A互换键位,字母 E、 U、 I、 F、 V的键位符号依次替换为 F、 E、 V、 I、 U,称作8. The digital sequence symbol keyboard and the information input method thereof according to claim 7, characterized in that the final vowel is specified on the "QWERTY" keyboard, and the upper line of the reference key is: a, ang, e, er, an , en, eng, au, eu, ei, ai; the reference key one line is: ia, iang, ie, i, ian, ien, ieng, iau, ieu, and the uei, uai; The lines are: ua, uang, ue (ue), u, uan (iian), uen (uen), ueng (iieng), the symbols in parentheses can be omitted; zh and z, 811 and 3, ch and c are respectively combined, Or the double initials Zh, Sh, and Ch are respectively designated on the character keys other than the single initial, or sequentially designated on the ", ", ".", and "/" character keys; or the Chinese initials are replaced with the Chinese phonetic symbols. Or phonetic symbols. 9. The digital sequence symbol keyboard and the information input method thereof according to claim 8, characterized in that the "QWERTY" keyboard, the letters Q and A are interchangeable keys, and the letters E, U, I, F, The key symbols of V are replaced by F, E, V, I, U in turn, called
"AWF"键盘;并且汉语音母码元 e和 eng, ie与 ieng, ue (ue) 与 ueng (ueng ) 分别互换键 位,或者把汉语音母符号替换为汉语拼音符号或注音符号。 "AWF" keyboard; and Chinese tone symbols e and eng, ie and ieng, ue (ue) and ueng (ueng) respectively exchange keys, or replace Chinese phonetic symbols with Chinese pinyin or phonetic symbols.
10、按照技术方案 9所述的数序码元键盘及其信息输入方法,其特征是,所述 "AWF"键盘 的字符布局,每一行由左至右依次变更为: 基准键行: 0,^ 1, ^ 2, 5,( , 1?;基准键下一 行: K, G, H, U, W, ", "及 """,字母 0, ", "及 "〈" , ". "及 ">" , "〃,及 "?" ;基准键上 一行: A, " ["及 " {", "],,及 " } ", D, T, N, E, B, M, P, F, ";"及 ":",称作 "XIY"键盘; 或者所述 "XIY"键盘,字符 Q与 K, J与 G, X与 H, B与 Z, M与 S, P与 C, F与 R分别互换键 位,称作 "HIY"键盘。  10. The number sequence symbol keyboard and the information input method thereof according to claim 9, wherein the character layout of the "AWF" keyboard is changed from left to right in sequence: a reference key line: 0, ^ 1, ^ 2, 5, ( , 1?; The next line of the base key: K, G, H, U, W, ", " and """, the letters 0, ", " and "<", "." And ">" , "〃, and "?"; the top line of the base key: A, "[" and "{", "],, and " } ", D, T, N, E, B, M, P , F, ";" and ":", called "XIY" keyboard; or the "XIY" keyboard, characters Q and K, J and G, X and H, B and Z, M and S, P and C , F and R respectively exchange the keys, called the "HIY" keyboard.
有益效果 Beneficial effect
与现有技术的简码相比,相同的击键次数,数序简码的数量却提高 10倍左右,一级数序简 码接近 300个,足以覆盖最常用单字或单字词;二级数序简码超 7000个,足以覆盖 3000个常 用单字或单字词;数序简码是字符编码的扩充并不占用其编码资源,几乎所有的数码都得到充 分地利用,可以彻底解决补加空格或数字 1才能输入很少简码的难题,常用汉字的输入效率大 幅度地提高,而且同一编码的数序简码之间,使用数序码元相互区别,更便于记忆和盲打。  Compared with the short code of the prior art, the number of keystrokes is increased by about 10 times, and the number of first-order digital short codes is close to 300, which is enough to cover the most commonly used single words or single words; The number of short codes is more than 7000, which is enough to cover 3000 commonly used words or single words. The sequence short code is the expansion of character encoding and does not occupy its coding resources. Almost all the numbers are fully utilized and can be completely solved. Space or number 1 can input the problem of few short codes. The input efficiency of commonly used Chinese characters is greatly improved, and the numbered symbols of the same code are distinguished from each other by numbers, which is more convenient for memory and blind typing.
技术方案 2的有益效果是,在每一列待输入字符的高一级别现有简码中选择数序简码,把 高一级别的最多 3个简码缩减为本级别的一个简码,简单而直观地揭示出现有技术与数序简 码的本质区别,便于更深入地理解和实施数序简码。  The technical solution 2 has the beneficial effects of selecting a sequence short code in a high level one existing short code of each column to be input characters, and reducing up to 3 short codes of a high level to a simple code of the level, simply It intuitively reveals the essential difference between the technology and the sequence short code, which makes it easier to understand and implement the sequence short code.
技术方案 3的有益效果是,同一列字符键的字根码元首笔画相同,则同指击键的字符键所 指定的字根码元可合并为字根首笔画,其数序的字根或笔画码元更加简单和直观。  The technical solution 3 has the beneficial effect that the first symbol of the root symbol of the same column of character keys is the same, and the radical symbol specified by the character key of the same type of the keystroke can be merged into the first stroke of the radical, and the root of the numerical sequence or Stroke symbols are simpler and more intuitive.
技术方案 4的有益效果是,声介韵编码附加数序单声调的数序简码字输入模式,可以更高 效率地盲打输入每个音节的最常用字;而声介韵编码附加数序双声调的数序简码音字输入模 式,还可以输入任一音节符号或其同音字;双声介韵编码附加序号的数序简码词字输入模式, 可以输入双音词或其任一单字,无需额外记忆单字的提示数码,是盲打输入单字的又一选择。  The beneficial effect of the technical solution 4 is that the acoustic syllabic code is added with a sequence-single-tone single-sequence short code word input mode, which can input the most commonly used words of each syllable more efficiently; Double-tone digital sequence short code input mode, you can also input any syllable symbol or its homonym; double-syllable coded additional sequence number-simplified code word input mode, you can input double-syllable words or any single word, There is no need to memorize the single-word prompt number, which is another option for blind typing of a single word.
技术方案 5的有益效果是: 无论全拼、 简拼还是双拼,声母附加数序单韵母,即可直接输 入 200多个声韵简码字,输入效率大幅度地提高,并且简码的学习和记忆难度大幅度地降低。 由于数码行指定了数序单韵母而无需使用编码字符输入,最多击键四次即可输入任一声介韵。  The beneficial effects of the technical solution 5 are: No matter whether the whole spelling, the simple spelling or the double spelling, the initials are added with the numbered single vowels, the direct input of more than 200 sound and rhyme short code words, the input efficiency is greatly improved, and the simple code learning and The difficulty of memory is greatly reduced. Since the digital line specifies a single-sequence single-final without the use of coded character input, you can enter any of the sounds by typing up to four times.
技术方案 6的有益效果是: 一律使用 V代替 "hu" ,虽然与汉语拼音方案有所不同,但最 多击键三次才输入的声介母,改为最多击键两次即可输入;由于数码行指定了数序单韵母而无 需再使用编码字符输入,最多击键三次即可输入任一声介韵,可以进一步地提高输入效率。  The beneficial effects of the technical solution 6 are: Always use V instead of "hu", although it is different from the Chinese pinyin scheme, but the voice mediator that is input by pressing the key three times at most can be input by changing the keystroke twice; The line specifies the number of single-final vowels without the need to use coded character input, and you can input any tone with up to three keystrokes, which can further improve the input efficiency.
技术方案 7的有益效果是:最多击键两次输入任一声介韵,采用所述的双拼编码附加数序 韵调母的数序简码音字输入方法,是最佳字编码输入法;采用所述的双拼编码附加数序韵调母 的数序简码字词输入方法,是最佳字词编码输入法,可以彻底地解决汉字编码输入难题。  The beneficial effect of the technical solution 7 is that: the maximum number of keystrokes is input twice, and the method of inputting the number-sequential short-sounding code of the double-sequence coding is used as the optimal word coding input method; The method of inputting the number-simplified code words of the double-splicing code-added number-sequence-tone is the best word-encoding input method, which can completely solve the problem of Chinese character coding input.
附图说明 DRAWINGS
图 1是汉语音母、汉语拼音和注音符号的单声母、 双声母、单介母及声介母符号对照表; 图 2是汉语音母、 汉语拼音和注音符号的介母、 单韵母及介韵母的符号对照表; 图 3是 "QWERTY"键盘斜列指法的声母和介韵母及数序韵调母的布局实施例,以及列笔画 字根码元布局及其数序的字根和笔画的布局实施例;图 4是图 3的正列指法的相应实施例; 图 5是 " AWF"键盘斜列指法的声母和介韵母及数序韵调母的布局实施例,及列笔画字根 码元布局及其数序的字根和笔画布局的另一实施例;图 6是图 5的正列指法的相应实施例; 图 7是全新设计的 "XIY"键盘斜列指法的声母和介韵母及其数序韵调母的布局实施例, 图 8是图 7的正列指法的相应实施例; Figure 1 is a comparison table of the monophonic, double, single and intermediate symbols of Chinese, Chinese, and phonetic symbols; Figure 2 is the mother of Chinese, Pinyin and phonetic symbols, single vowel and mediation. The symbolic comparison table of the finals; Fig. 3 is a layout example of the initials and the primes and the primes of the "QWERTY" keyboard oblique indexing, and the layout of the strokes and the roots of the strokes and their numbers and strokes Layout embodiment; FIG. 4 is a corresponding embodiment of the positive indexing of FIG. 3; FIG. 5 is a layout embodiment of the initial and initial vowels of the "AWF" keyboard oblique index fingering, and the column stroke root Another embodiment of the symbol layout and the root and stroke layout of the sequence; Figure 6 is a corresponding embodiment of the positive fingering of Figure 5; Figure 7 is the initial and initial reference of the "XIY" keyboard oblique fingering of the newly designed keyboard. a layout embodiment of a final vowel and its numerical order vowel, and FIG. 8 is a corresponding embodiment of the positive indexing of FIG. 7;
图 9是全新设计的 "HIY"键盘斜列指法的声母和介韵母及其数序韵调母的布局实施例, 图 10是图 9的正列指法的相应实施例;  9 is a layout example of the initial and final vowels of the newly designed "HIY" keyboard oblique index fingering, and FIG. 10 is a corresponding embodiment of the positive fingering of FIG. 9;
图 11-20是触摸屏虚拟的字母键盘的多个实施例,图 11、 13、 15、 17、 19均是斜列指法, 图 12、 14、 16、 18、 20均是正列指法;图 11是 "QWERTY"键盘的字符布局图,图 12是 "AWF" 键盘的字符布局图,图 13是 "QWERTY"键盘的拼音或音母符号的声母布局图,图 14是 "AWF" 键盘的拼音或音母符号的声母布局图,图 15是 "QWERTY"键盘的拼音符号介韵母布局图,图 16是 "AWF"键盘的音母符号的介韵母布局图,图 17是 "XIY"键盘的拼音或音母符号的声母 布局图,图 18是 "AWF"键盘的注音符号的声母布局图,图 19是 "HIY"键盘的拼音或音母符 号的声母布局图,图 20是 "AWF"键盘的注音符号的韵母布局图;图 15、 16和 20中,介母后 面的 "+"代表基准键上一行同一列的单韵母,若使用专用的双字节介韵母符号则效果更佳。  11-20 are various embodiments of the touch screen virtual alphabet keyboard, and FIGS. 11, 13, 15, 17, and 19 are both oblique fingering, and FIGS. 12, 14, 16, 18, and 20 are positive indexing; FIG. 11 is The character layout of the "QWERTY" keyboard, Figure 12 is the character layout of the "AWF" keyboard, Figure 13 is the initial layout of the pinyin or vowel symbol of the "QWERTY" keyboard, and Figure 14 is the pinyin or sound of the "AWF" keyboard. The initial layout of the mother symbol, Figure 15 is the pinyin layout of the "QWERTY" keyboard, Figure 16 is the layout of the prime symbol of the "AWF" keyboard, and Figure 17 is the pinyin or sound of the "XIY" keyboard. The initial layout of the mother symbol, Figure 18 is the initial layout of the phonetic symbol of the "AWF" keyboard, Figure 19 is the initial layout of the pinyin or initial symbol of the "HIY" keyboard, and Figure 20 is the phonetic symbol of the "AWF" keyboard. The vowel layout; in Figures 15, 16 and 20, the "+" after the mediator represents the single vowel of the same column on the top of the reference key. If a special double-byte vowel symbol is used, the effect is better.
图 21是声母附加正列指法的数序单韵母,指定并提示的数序声韵简码字的一个实施例; 图 22是声介韵附加斜列指法的数序单声调及其它数码,数序音节简码字的实施例;图 23 是其正列指法的相应实施例;圆括号内是其音节符号,方括号内是简码单字词实用频度数据; 图 24-27是数序双声调的实施例,图 24和 26均是斜列指法,而图 25和 27均是正列指法; 图 28、 29分别是图 25正列指法的数序双声调的音节符号和音节简码字、 及其相反布局 的两个实施例,圆括号内是简码的标调或零声调的音节符号,方括号内是简码实用频度数据。 本发明的最佳实施方式  Figure 21 is an example of a sequence-single-single vowel with a positive-altitude fingering of the initials, and a sequence-sounding vocoded word that is specified and prompted; Figure 22 is a sequence-single-tone and other digital, numerical order An embodiment of a syllable short code word; Fig. 23 is a corresponding embodiment of the positive column fingering; the syllabic symbols are in parentheses, and the simple frequency single word practical frequency data is in square brackets; Figure 24-27 is a sequence double For the embodiment of the tone, Figures 24 and 26 are both oblique fingering, and Figures 25 and 27 are both positive fingering; Figures 28 and 29 are the syllabic symbols and syllables of the sequenced two-tones of the positive fingering of Figure 25, respectively. And two embodiments of the opposite layout, the parentheses are short or zero tone syllable symbols, and the square brackets are short code practical frequency data. BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION
采用图 8 "XIY"键盘汉语音母的声母和介韵母及数序单韵母布局,以及图 27的数序双声 调,限定最大输入码长为 4,采用下述的双拼编码附加数序韵调母的数序简码字词输入方法: 首次击键输入任一编码字符,如果是一个声母,则与数序单韵母组合为数序的声韵,在数 码行指定并且提示图 21的声韵简码字,其中单韵母 "e"和 "eng"及其所对应的声韵简码字 均互换位置;下次击键使用单韵母的任一数码,直接输入其声韵简码字而结束该进程;  The initial and final vowel layouts of the Chinese syllabic of the "XIY" keyboard of Fig. 8 and the sequenced double vowels of Fig. 27 are used, and the maximum input code length is limited to 4, and the following double splicing code is used to add the number of rhymes. The method of inputting the number of short code words of the mother-in-law: inputting any coded character by the first keystroke. If it is an initial, it is combined with the single-sequence of the sequence to form the sequence of the rhyme, which is specified in the digital line and prompts the syllabic code of Figure 21. Word, in which the single vowels "e" and "eng" and their corresponding vowels are interchanged; the next keystroke uses any number of single vowels, directly inputting its vowels and ends the process;
否则,进一步地输入第 2个编码字符,如果所输入的是有效的声介韵编码,则附加数序的双 声调,组成两组数序声介韵调,在数码行指定并且提示数序的音节简码字和音节符号: 使用左 手击键的任一数码、 直接输入左手单声调所对应的音节简码字,或者使用右手击键的任一数 码、 直接输入右手单声调所对应的音节符号,从而结束该进程;或者在输入任一音节符号之后, 依据此前击键的手指与待输入数码的手指击键效率的降序,依次提示实用频度降序的一组或 多组、 每组最多 12个同音字,再次击键使用任一数码输入所提示的同音字再结束该进程; 否则,进一步地输入第 3个编码字符,如果所输入的是有效的声介韵与声母编码,则采用所 述的声介韵与声母编码附加数序单韵母的数序简码词输入模式,使用次字单韵母的任一数码, 直接输入其简码双音词而结束该进程;具体的输入方法,参见后续的实施例。  Otherwise, the second coded character is further input. If the input is a valid arpeggio code, the double tone of the sequence is added to form two sets of sequence sounds, which are specified in the digital line and the sequence is indicated. Syllable short code words and syllable symbols: Use any digit of the left-hand keystroke, directly input the syllable short codeword corresponding to the left-hand single tone, or use any digit of the right-hand keystroke, directly input the syllable symbol corresponding to the right-hand single tone , thereby ending the process; or after inputting any syllable symbol, according to the descending order of the keystrokes of the previously keystrokes and the digits of the finger to be input, sequentially prompting one or more groups of the descending order of the practical frequency, each group of up to 12 a homophone, press the key again to use the homophone that is prompted by any digital input to end the process; otherwise, enter the third encoded character further, if the input is a valid phonological and initial encoding, then use the The sound-speech and initials coded with the number-single-single-single-single-simplified code-word input mode, using the number of the single-word single-final, directly input its shortcode Syllable words the end of the process; particular input method, see the subsequent embodiment.
否则,进一步地输入第 4个编码字符,如果所输入的是有效的声介韵与声介韵编码,则采用 所述的双声介韵编码附加序号的数序简码词字输入模式,使用任一数码输入所提示的双音词、 或其任一单字而结束该进程;具体的输入方法,参见后续的实施例。  Otherwise, the fourth coded character is further input, and if the input is a valid sound and rhyme coding, the double-speech-encoded additional sequence number-simplified code word input mode is used. The process is terminated by a digital input of the doubled word suggested, or any single word thereof; for a specific input method, see the subsequent embodiment.
或者进一步地,如果所输入的第 1、 2个编码字符,和 /或第 3、 4个编码字符,都不是有效 的声介韵的编码,则视为多音词,依次使用每个字的声母或补加末字的介韵母编码输入。 这是 传统的多音词的拼音编码输入方法,不再详细说明。 本发明的实施方式 Or further, if the input 1st, 2nd coded characters, and/or the 3rd and 4th coded characters are not valid coded codes, then they are regarded as multi-syllable words, and each word is used in turn. Initial consonant code input for initials or supplementary words. This is a traditional method for inputting pinyin codes for multi-syllable words and will not be described in detail. Embodiments of the invention
本发明可以使用 "QWERTY"键盘(图 3或图 4)、 或其改进的 "AWF"键盘(图 5或图 6), 以及全新设计的 "XIY"键盘(图 7或图 8)或 "HIY"键盘(图 9或图 10),统称为字母键盘。 或者使用所述字母键盘的虚拟键盘,即在显示器上显示字母键盘的图形,点击鼠标的左键或右 键模仿字母键盘的击键输入方式;或者使用触摸屏显示字母键盘的图形 (图 11-20),使用手指 或专用笔点击或触摸而按键,模仿字母键盘的击键输入方式。  The invention may use a "QWERTY" keyboard (Fig. 3 or Fig. 4), or a modified "AWF" keyboard (Fig. 5 or Fig. 6), and a newly designed "XIY" keyboard (Fig. 7 or Fig. 8) or "HIY". "Keyboard (Figure 9 or Figure 10), collectively referred to as the alphabetic keyboard. Or use the virtual keyboard of the alphanumeric keyboard, that is, display the graphic of the alphanumeric keyboard on the display, click the left or right mouse button to simulate the keystroke input mode of the alphanumeric keyboard; or use the touch screen to display the alphanumeric keyboard graphic (Fig. 11-20) Use a finger or a special pen to click or touch and press the key to simulate the keystroke input mode of the alphabetic keyboard.
所述键盘的每个字符键位,标注一个常规字符及其上档字符,称作字符布局,所标注的字 符受到字符键数量的限制,一般为 35对左右。按惯例,成对的大小写字母只把大写字母标注在 字符键左上角;而非字母的常规字符标注在字符键左下角,其上档字符标注在字符键左上角。  Each character key of the keyboard is marked with a regular character and its upper character, which is called a character layout. The characters marked are limited by the number of character keys, and are generally about 35 pairs. By convention, pairs of uppercase and lowercase letters only mark uppercase letters in the upper left corner of the character key; regular characters that are not letters are marked in the lower left corner of the character key, and the upper character is marked in the upper left corner of the character key.
本发明使用数码即可直接输入数序简码,其原因就在于数码本来并没有参与编码,而指定 数序码元之后,才作为一种特殊的编码字符参与编码,是所输入编码附加的编码字符,与一般 的编码字符有很大的区别:在输入每一个编码字符之后,如果输入数码就作为编码的结尾而参 与编码,如果不输入数码就不参与编码,继续输入后续的编码字符,直至达到最大输入码长为 止。 也就是说,数序简码既可以直接输入,也可以直接放弃,并没有直接参与字符的编码。  The invention can directly input the numerical sequence short code by using the digital code, because the digital originally does not participate in the encoding, and after the digital sequential symbol is specified, the encoding is participated as a special encoding character, which is the encoding of the input encoding. Characters, which are quite different from general coded characters: after inputting each coded character, if the input number is used as the end of the code, the code is involved. If the number is not entered, the code is not involved, and the subsequent coded characters are continued. Until the maximum input code length is reached. That is to say, the sequence short code can be input directly or directly, and does not directly participate in the encoding of characters.
现有的汉字编码输入法,仅使用空格或数字 1输入简码,原因在于没有找到编码字符与数 码的对应关系,不能使用数码代替编码字符而指定简码,只能把数码作为重码的序号和选择符 号。 本发明增加了数序码元,把同指击键的字符与数码关联起来,就彻底地解决了这个难题。  The existing Chinese character encoding input method uses only a space or a number 1 to input a short code, because the correspondence between the encoded character and the digital is not found, and the short code cannot be specified by using the digital instead of the encoded character, and the digital can only be used as the serial number of the recode. Select the symbol. The invention adds a sequence of symbols, and associates the characters with the fingerstrokes with the digital, which completely solves the problem.
数序简码可以视为数序重码的直接改进,两者都使用数码作为附加的数序编码,但却有本 质上的差别:每个数码都指定相互区别而又有所不同的、具有特定含义的数码码元,按数序组 成数序码元,数序简码使用数序码元相互区分而不再是重码,因此,数序码元是数序简码与数 序重码的关键区别。 不过,如果使用现有的汉字编码输入处理软件实施本发明,则数序简码依 据其数序码元而依次指定在数码键上,相当于数序重码,使用数码键直接输入。  The number sequence short code can be regarded as a direct improvement of the digital sequence code. Both use digital as the additional number sequence code, but there are essential differences: each number is specified differently and differently, with a specific meaning. The digital symbol is composed of a sequence of symbols in numerical order. The sequence-sequence code uses the sequence code symbols to distinguish one from another and is no longer a heavy code. Therefore, the number sequence symbol is a key difference between the number sequence short code and the digital sequence code. However, if the present invention is implemented using the existing Chinese character code input processing software, the digital sequence short code is sequentially designated on the digital key according to its sequence code symbol, which is equivalent to the digital sequential code, and is directly input using the digital key.
可以使用任意一个现有的汉字编码输入方法指定数序简码,并且都能够得到改进和提高, 简码的数量都可以增加 10倍左右。 但是其改进和提高的效果却有很大的差别,主要取决于同 一手指击键的码元之间具有多少相同的信息,相同的信息越多就越容易合并和整合,其数序简 码就越规范、越容易记忆。前提是数码没有作为编码字符使用即没有直接参与编码,因为一旦 数码直接参与编码就与字符没有区别而失去了独立性,就不能直接输入其所指定的数序简码。  Any existing Chinese character encoding input method can be used to specify the numerical sequence short code, and both can be improved and improved, and the number of short codes can be increased by about 10 times. However, the improvement and improvement effect are quite different. It mainly depends on how much the same information is between the symbols of the same fingerstroke. The more the same information, the easier it is to merge and integrate. The more standardized, the easier it is to remember. The premise is that the digital is not used as a coded character, that is, it does not directly participate in the encoding, because once the digital directly participates in the encoding, there is no difference from the character and the independence is lost, and the digital short code specified by the digital code cannot be directly input.
数序码元是数序简码的基础,必须首先指定数序码元,既可以是音码码元,也可以是形码 码元,或者是音形结合的码元。同一列字符键所指定的全部码元也指定在数码行即为数序码元, 或在数码行直接指定数序码元,如果同一列码元没有共同的信息,就是同一列码元的直接组合; 如果同一列的码元具有同类信息,就可以合并后提取其同类信息,其数序码元就更加简化。  The number sequence symbol is the basis of the sequence short code. The sequence code symbol must first be specified, which can be either a code symbol or a shape code symbol, or a combination of sound and shape symbols. All the symbols specified by the same column of character keys are also specified as digital sequence symbols, or directly in the digital line. If the same column of symbols does not have common information, it is a direct combination of the same column of symbols. If the symbols in the same column have the same kind of information, they can be combined to extract the same kind of information, and the sequence number symbols are more simplified.
数序码元能否合并和简化,是衡量码元布局是否合理的一个重要标志,是本发明首创的一 个评价指标。 现有技术因为缺少这样的评价指标,所设计的码元布局,几乎没有在同一列的字 符键上按共同的属性信息指定其码元,因此其数码码元很难简化只能相互合并。  Whether the sequence symbols can be combined and simplified is an important indicator for measuring whether the symbol layout is reasonable, and is an evaluation index pioneered by the present invention. In the prior art, because such an evaluation index is lacking, the designed symbol layout has almost no symbol specified by the common attribute information on the character key of the same column, so that the digital symbols are difficult to simplify and can only be merged with each other.
依据所输入编码附加数序码元而指定数序简码,因为涉及具体编码过程,对于形码输入法 来说是十分复杂的,为了便于说明可以替换为简单且直观的方法,即在每一列待输入字符的高 一级别现有简码中选择数序简码,按数序组成本级别的数序简码:把每一列字符键所指定的高 一级别的简码之一,即 3行 11列字符键所指定的 11列、 每列最多 3个高一级别的简码之一, 分别指定在同指击键的数码键上,即减缩为 11个数序简码。 可以保留原有的补加空格的简码 输入方法,如果采用正列指法还可保留补加数码 1的简码输入方法。 可应用于任一现有技术, 无论是音码还是形码都适用,是把同指击键的字符与数码相互关联的另一种简单手段。 形码码元主要使用汉字的字根、 笔画与笔画或字根的组合,但一般的形码码元,同一列的 字符键所指定的码元杂乱无章,很难相互合并,因此形码的数序码元几乎总是所在列全部形码 码元的直接组合,其数序码元很难整合和简化。 一般来说,形码码元与其所指定字符键的字符 并没有直接关系,形码码元可以指定在任一字母键盘的任一字符键上,其码元布局基本不受字 符布局的约束而是灵活多变的,所以形码码元之间的相对位置才是码元布局的关键。 因此,形 码的码元布局有很大的调整空间,可以进行适当地必要的调整,以便更好地实施本发明。 The number sequence short code is specified according to the input code additional number sequence symbol, because it involves a specific coding process, which is very complicated for the shape code input method, and can be replaced with a simple and intuitive method for convenience of description, that is, in each column Selecting the sequence short code in the existing short code of the upper level of the character to be input, and forming the sequence short code of the level in numerical order: one of the high level one short codes specified by each column character key, that is, 3 lines 11 columns specified by the 11-character key, and up to 3 high-level short codes of each column are respectively designated on the digital keys of the same fingerstroke key, that is, reduced to 11 digital short codes. The short code input method of the original additional space can be retained, and if the positive index method is used, the short code input method of the supplementary digital 1 can be retained. It can be applied to any prior art, whether it is a phonetic code or a shape code, and is another simple means of correlating the characters of the same fingerstroke with the digital. The shape code symbol mainly uses the combination of the root of the Chinese character, the stroke and the stroke or the root, but the general shape code symbol, the symbol specified by the character key of the same column is disordered, and it is difficult to merge with each other, so the number of the shape code The sequence symbol is almost always a direct combination of all the shape code symbols in the column, and the sequence code symbols are difficult to integrate and simplify. Generally speaking, the shape code symbol is not directly related to the character of the specified character key. The shape code symbol can be specified on any character key of any alphabet keyboard, and the symbol layout is basically not restricted by the character layout. Flexible, so the relative position between the shape code symbols is the key to the symbol layout. Therefore, the symbol layout of the shape code has a large adjustment space, and appropriate adjustments can be made to better implement the present invention.
现有技术 2的 "五笔字型"码元布局是个很好的例子,其码元可以分解为字根的首笔画与 次笔画的组合,首笔画或次笔画相同的码元比较容易整合,是一般的形码码元所不具备的。 但 非常遗憾,最下面一行字符键的码元布局偏离了其它码元的列向布局规律,必须调整其码元的 布局,其数序码元才能够简化,否则每一列字符键的数序码元也只是每个码元的简单合并。 本 发明首先说明如何利用 "五笔字型"的现有技术直接增加其数序简码,进一步地改进其码元布 局而更好地指定其数序简码,从而说明如何指定形码的数序简码。  The "five-word" symbol layout of the prior art 2 is a good example, and the symbol can be decomposed into a combination of the first stroke and the second stroke of the radical, and the same symbol of the first stroke or the second stroke is relatively easy to integrate. The general shape code symbols are not available. But unfortunately, the symbol layout of the bottom row of character keys deviates from the column-to-layout rule of other symbols, and the layout of the symbols must be adjusted. The sequence number symbols can be simplified, otherwise the sequence code of each column of character keys can be simplified. Meta is just a simple merge of each symbol. The invention firstly explains how to directly increase the number sequence short code by using the "five pen type" prior art, further improve the symbol layout and better specify the number sequence short code, thereby explaining how to specify the number order of the shape code. Short Code.
现有技术 2的 "五笔字型" "86版"简体、 或 "98版"简体或繁体的字词编码输入法,简 称五笔输入法,其码元的标记符号基本一致,即键名和 /或码元字根的首笔画与次笔画的组合 所代表的 25个码元,简称五笔码元,包括: 王一一,土一 I,大一 j,木一、,工一乙;目 I一, 日 I |,口 | 田 | 、,山 |乙; 禾 一、 白) |、月) )、人 、金)乙;言、一、立、 I、 水、 J、 火、 、、 之、乙;已乙一,子乙 I,女乙 J,又乙、,乡乙乙。  The "Wubi type" "86 version" simplified version, or the "98 version" simplified or traditional word encoding input method of the prior art 2, referred to as the Wubi input method, the symbol symbols of the symbols are basically the same, that is, the key name and/or The 25 symbols represented by the combination of the first stroke and the second stroke of the symbol root are referred to as the five-stroke symbol, including: Wang Yiyi, Tu Yi I, Da Yi J, Mu Yi, Gong Yi B; , 日I |, 口 | 田 |,,山|乙;禾一,白) |,月)),人,金)乙;言,一,立, I, 水, J,火,,, B; has one, one child I, female B, and B, township B.
五笔输入法,其斜列指法的数序字根码元为: 1工金, 2木人乡, 3大月又, 4土白女, 5王禾 子, 6目言已, 7日立山, 8口水, 9田火, 0之;每个数码均加 1即为其正列指法的数序字根码元。  The five-stroke input method, the root-coded root symbol of the oblique-column fingering method is: 1 Gongjin, 2 Murenxiang, 3 Dayue, 4 Tubai, 5 Wanghezi, 6 eyes, 7 Rishan, 8 saliva , 9 Tian Huo, 0; each number is added to 1 is the number of the root symbol of the positive index.
下面以斜列指法的五笔码元的数序字根码元为基础,说明如何指定其数序简码。原有的一 级简码可以保留,使用一个字符补加一个空格而输入;相对应的一级数序简码则使用一个字符 补加一个数码而输入。 两种简码击键次数相同,并且完全置于同一个编码输入条件之下。  The following is based on the numbered root symbol of the five-stroke symbol of the oblique column fingering, indicating how to specify the number sequence shortcode. The original one-level short code can be reserved, and one character is added with one space to input; the corresponding first-order digital short code is input by using one character plus one digit. The two shortcode keystrokes are the same and are placed under the same code input condition.
使用 g即 "王"所代表的所有五笔码元,依次与斜列指法数序码元的每个数码码元组合: 即 1王 +工金, 2王 +木人乡 , 3王 +大月又, 4王 +土白女, 5王 +王禾子, 6王 +目言已, 7王 +日立 山, 8王 +口水, 9王 +田火, 0王 +之,依次选择符合 "五笔字型"编码规则的汉字中,实用频度较 高的汉字,作为每个数码的一级数序简码,具体编码方法需依据五笔输入法不再详述。 这种指 定数序简码的方法,优点是选择余地更大,可以推翻五笔输入法原有的所有简码重新选择;但 其缺点也正在于此: 放弃五笔输入法原有的所有简码,只适合新的使用者;那些熟练的使用者 不但要重新记忆简码,甚至与原来的简码相互冲突造成混乱,因此不宜提倡,以下不再提及。  Use g, that is, all the five symbols represented by "Wang", in turn, and each digital symbol combination of the oblique index finger sequence symbol: 1 king + work gold, 2 king + Mu Renxiang, 3 king + big moon Also, 4 king + earth white female, 5 king + Wang Hezi, 6 king + witness, 7 king + Hitachi mountain, 8 king + saliva, 9 king + Tian Huo, 0 king +, in turn, in line with the "five strokes" In the Chinese characters of the coding rules, the Chinese characters with higher practical frequency are used as the first-order digital short codes of each digital. The specific coding method is not described in detail according to the Wubi input method. This method of specifying the numbered short code has the advantage of more room for selection, and can overturn all the short code re-selections of the five-stroke input method; but the disadvantage is also here: abandon all the short codes of the five-stroke input method, Only suitable for new users; those skilled users not only need to re-remember the shortcode, but even conflict with the original short code to cause confusion, so it is not advisable to advocate, the following will not be mentioned.
最简单和有效的方法,就是直接利用五笔输入法原有的简码指定其数序简码。可以在五笔 字型的二级简码中选择其一级数序简码,例如,使用五笔输入法,输入字符 g之后,再分别输入 不同的字符补加空格,即可得到待输入二级简码的简码布局如下:  The easiest and most effective way is to specify the shortcode of the number directly using the original shortcode of the Wubi input method. You can select the first-order digital short code in the five-character two-level short code. For example, use the five-stroke input method, input the character g, and then input different characters to add spaces, you can get the second level to be input. The shortcode layout of the code is as follows:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0  1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
Q列 W珍 E表 R珠 T玫 Y玉 U平 I不 0来 P  Q column W Zhen E table R beads T Mei Y Yu U Ping I not 0 to P
A开 S末 D天 F于 G五 H下 J理 K事 L画  A open S end D day F in G five H under J Li K things L painting
Z X互 C到 V妻 B屯 N与 M现  Z X mutual C to V wife B屯 N and M now
斜列指法的数序简码,可以分别在 1 "列开"、 2 "珍末互"、 3 "表天到"、 4 "珠于妻"、 5 "玫五屯"、 6 "玉下与"、 7 "平理现"、 8 "不事"、 9 "来画"的每个数码列的简码中,分别 选择一个简码作为 G键的一级数序简码。例如可以选定基准键行的简码,则 G键的一级数序简 码依次为: gl开、 g2末、 g3天、 g4于、 g5五、 g6下、 g7理、 g8事、 g9画;或选择基准键 上一行的简码,则 g键的一级数序简码依次为: gl列、 g2珍、 g3表、 g4珠、 g5玫、 g6玉、 g7平、 g8不、 g9来;或选择每一列字符键的二级简码中实用频度较高的单字或单字词作为 g 键的一级数序简码。 例如有一个单字词的实用频度统计数据为: 1 "列 2172开 7068"、 2 "珍 442末 3263互 957"、 3 "表 4718天 6961到 47164"、 4 "珠 514于 26514妻 500 "、 5 "玫 0 五 21372屯 191 "、 6 "玉 816下 28622与 32341 "、 7 "平 5709理 2200现 2076"、 8 "不 72334 事 6612"、 9 "来 39552画 3027"。 因此选择数序简码依次为: gl列、 g2末、 g3到、 g4于、 g5五、 g6与、 g7平、 g8不、 g9来。 也可替换为单字实用频度统计数据而重新选择。 按照这 种方法,绘制出每个字符输入之后,所有待输入二级简码的简码布局图,就可以得到 25个编码 字符的一级数序简码。 斜列指法一级数序简码,每个数码均加 1即为正列指法一级数序简码。 The numerical order short code of the oblique column fingering can be divided into 1 "column open", 2 "zhen end mutual", 3 "day to day", 4 "bead to wife", 5 "rose five", 6 "under jade" In the short code of each digital column of ", 7", "8", "9", and "9", select a short code as the first-order short code of the G key. For example, the short code of the reference key row can be selected, and the first order number of the G key is in the order of: gl open, g2 end, g3 day, g4 in, g5 five, g6, g7, g8, g9 Or select the short code of the previous line of the base key, then the first-order numerical code short code of the g key is: gl column, g2zhen, g3 table, g4 bead, g5 rose, g6 jade, G7 flat, g 8 not, g9; or select the single-word or single-word with higher practical frequency in the second-level short code of each column character key as the first-order digital short code of the g key. For example, the practical frequency statistics of a single word are: 1 "column 2172 open 7068", 2 "zhen 442 end 3263 mutual 957", 3 "table 4718 days 6961 to 47164", 4 "bead 514 at 26514 wife 500 ", 5" rose 0 5 21372 屯 191 ", 6 "Jade 816 under 28622 and 32341", 7 "Ping 5709, 2200 now 2076", 8 "No 72,343 things 6612", 9 "to 39952 draw 3027". Therefore, the order number of short codes is selected as follows: gl column, g2 end, g3 to, g4, g5, g6, g7, g8, g9. It can also be re-selected by replacing it with single-word utility frequency statistics. According to this method, after drawing each character input, all the short code layouts of the two-level short code to be input can obtain the first-order digital short code of 25 coded characters. The oblique column refers to the first-order digital short code, and each digit is incremented by one, which is the positive-order first-order numerical sequence short code.
一级数序简码的数量虽然只有五笔字型二级简码数量的 3分之 1左右,但因为 25个字符 键都有 10个一级数序简码,因此是五笔字型一级简码数量的 10倍,而且都是击键两次即可输 入两键简码字的数量多达 250个,如果保留原来的一级简码补加空格输入,则总数为 275个, 常用单字的输入效率无疑会大幅度地提高。  Although the number of first-order digital short codes is only about one-third of the number of five-character two-level short codes, since the 25 character keys have 10 first-order numerical short codes, it is a five-character first-level simple 10 times the number of codes, and the number of two-key short code words can be up to 250 by pressing the keystroke twice. If the original first-level short code is added, the total number is 275, which is commonly used. The input efficiency will undoubtedly increase dramatically.
如果绘制出任意 2个字符输入之后,待输入三级简码的简码布局图,即可在五笔字型的三 级简码中,选择其 2个字符编码附加数码的二级数序简码,最多可达 25*25*10=6250个,击键 三次即可直接输入,也是其原有二级简码数量的 10倍。 如果保留原有的二级简码补加空格输 入,则二级数序简码是原有简码数量的 11倍。 例如,使用五笔输入法,输入字符 f j之后,再输 入不同的字符补加空格,即可得到待输入三级简码的简码布局如下:  If you draw any two characters input and then enter the short-coded layout of the three-level short code, you can select the two-character coded additional digital second-order short code in the five-character three-level short code. Up to 25*25*10=6250, you can enter it directly by typing three times, which is also 10 times the number of its original two-level shortcode. If the original two-level short code is added to add a space input, the second-order short code is 11 times the original short code. For example, using the Wubi input method, after inputting the character f j , and then inputting different characters to add spaces, the shortcode layout of the three-level short code to be input is obtained as follows:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0  1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
Q埸 W翰 E朝 R T乾 Y U I 0 P进  Q埸 Whan E toward R T dry Y U I 0 P into
A戟 S D F埋 G坦 H刊 J亓 K井 L墁  A戟 S D F buried G Tan H magazine J亓 K well L墁
Z X C V B N塌 M  Z X C V B N collapse M
因此,输入两个字符 fj之后,五笔码元的二级数序简码可以依次指定为: fjl戟、 fj2翰、 fj3朝、 fj4埋、 fj5乾、 fj6刊、 fj7亓、 fj8井、 fj9墁、 fjO进。 使用同样的方法可以指 定全部 25*25共 625个双字符组合的五笔码元编码附加一个数码的二级数序简码。 斜列指法 的二级数序简码,每个数码均加 1即为其正列指法的二级数序简码。  Therefore, after inputting two characters fj, the second-order short code of the five-stroke symbol can be specified as: fjl戟, fj2han, fj3, fj4, fj5, fj6, fj7亓, fj8, fj9墁, fjO enter. Using the same method, it is possible to specify a total of 25*25 625 two-character combinations of five-symbol codes plus a digital second-order sequence shortcode. The second-order sequence short code of the oblique index fingering, plus 1 for each digit is the second-order short code of its positive column fingering.
依次类推,即可得到其它各个级别的斜列指法或正列指法的数序简码。这种数序简码受到 现有的五笔输入法的码元布局的限制,例如,五笔码元布局第 5区的五笔码元分别右移了一个 键位,破坏了其它码元字根的次笔画列向布局,虽然也可以增加简码的数量,但难以最大限度 地发挥本发明数序简码的优势,主要是每一列字符键的所有五笔码元缺少共同信息,难以相互 合并和简化,只能合并为数序字根码元,不能进一步地简化为数序笔画码元。  By analogy, you can get the sequence short codes of other various levels of oblique or positive index. Such a digital sequence short code is limited by the symbol layout of the existing five-stroke input method. For example, the five-character symbols in the fifth region of the five-character symbol layout are respectively shifted by one key position, destroying the times of other symbol roots. Stroke column layout, although the number of short codes can also be increased, it is difficult to maximize the advantages of the sequence short code of the present invention, mainly that all five symbols of each column of character keys lack common information, and it is difficult to merge and simplify each other. Can only be combined into a number of root symbols, can not be further simplified into a number of stroke symbols.
五笔输入法的码元布局,第 5区五笔码元都左移一个键位,码元"山 I乙"移回 "; "的键 位,其斜列指法的数序字根码元相应地更改为: 1工金乡, 2木人又, 3大月女, 4土白子,一王 禾已, 6目言, 7日立, 8口水, 9田火, 0之山;每个数码均加 1即为其正列指法的数序字根码元。 由于同一列字符键的五笔码元,字根的次笔画相同,因此可合并为同一个字根的次笔画;而同 手击键且同一行的五笔码元,字根的首笔画相同。因此,其数序字根码元简化为数序笔画码元: ( I 、乙)分别与 1乙, 2 、, 3 4 I, 5—的组合;以及(一 J )分别与 6—, 7 |, 8 9 、, 0乙的组合;每个数码均加 1即为其正列指法的数序笔画码元。 因此,如果一个五笔码元字根 的首笔画为 I、 、或乙,则使用左区字根次笔画的数码输入其数序简码;如果一个五笔码元字 根的首笔画为一或 j,则使用右区字根次笔画的数码输入其数序简码。 显然,五笔码元的布局 更合理,更便于记忆。 原五笔码元布局的编码和数序简码,变更第 5区五笔码元的字符即可。  The symbol layout of the five-stroke input method, the five-character symbols in the fifth area are shifted to the left by one key position, and the symbol "Mountain I B" is moved back to the ";" key, and the oblique-column finger-numbered root symbol is correspondingly Changed to: 1 Gong Jin Xiang, 2 Mu Ren, 3 Da Yue Nu, 4 Tu Bai Zi, Yi Wang He, 6 Yuan Yan, 7 Ri Li, 8 Shui, 9 Tian Huo, 0 Mountain; each digital plus 1 is the number sequence root symbol of its positive fingering. Since the pen strokes of the same column of characters are the same, the substrokes of the root are the same, so they can be merged into the second stroke of the same radical. The same strokes are the same for the five strokes of the same row. Therefore, the number of root symbols is reduced to a number of stroke symbols: (I, B) respectively with a combination of 1 B, 2, 3 4 I, 5 -; and (a J) respectively with 6 -, 7 | , 8 9 , , 0 B combination; each number is added 1 is the number of stroke symbols of its positive column fingering. Therefore, if the first stroke of a five-character root is I, , or B, the digits of the left-character stroke are used to input the number-simplified shortcode; if the first stroke of a five-character radical is one or j Then, use the digital input of the right area to input the digital short code. Obviously, the layout of the five symbols is more reasonable and easier to remember. The code of the original five-stroke symbol layout and the short-coded short code can be changed by changing the characters of the five-character symbols in the fifth area.
可以进一步地调整五笔码元的布局,使其码元布局更合理,图 3-6就是五笔码元布局的多 个实施例。 每个字符键的中间行即为五笔码元,包括键名及其码元字根的首笔画与次笔画,同 指击键的字符键所合并的每个数码的字根码元,分别按数序排列即为其数序字根码元,并且依 据其首笔画与次笔画编制出改进的区位码,标注在所在字符键右上角的大括号之内。 The layout of the five-stroke symbols can be further adjusted to make the symbol layout more reasonable. Figure 3-6 shows the layout of the five-stroke symbols. An embodiment. The middle line of each character key is five symbols, including the first stroke and the second stroke of the key name and its symbol root, and the root symbol of each digit combined with the character key of the fingerprint key, respectively The numerical order is the root symbol of the number, and the improved location code is compiled according to the first stroke and the second stroke, and is marked in the braces in the upper right corner of the character key.
图 3-6的数序字根码元也可进一步地简化: 每个数码键右上角的笔画是其字根首笔画的 数码码元,每个数码键底行的笔画为字根次笔画的数码码元,左手数码键是一种,右手数码键 是另一种,每个数码的字根首笔画与字根次笔画组合,分别按数序排列即为其数序笔画码元。  The number sequence root symbol of Figure 3-6 can be further simplified: the stroke in the upper right corner of each digital key is the digital symbol of the first stroke of the root, and the stroke of the bottom line of each digital key is the stroke of the root stroke. The digital symbol, the left-hand digital key is one type, and the right-hand digital key is another type. The first stroke of each digital root is combined with the root stroke and the stroke is arranged in numerical order, that is, the number of stroke symbols.
图 3和图 4的五笔码元布局,斜列指法图 3的数序字根码元为: 1子又乡 , 2立火之, 3白人 金, 4日田山, 5土木工, 6王大, 7目口, 8禾月, 9言水, 0已女;每个数码均加 1即为其正列指法 的数序字根码元。 可分别简化为五笔码元字根的首笔画与次笔画组合的数序笔画码元。 图 3 为: 1乙, 2、, 3 J, 4 I , 5—,分别与( | 、乙)组合;以及 6—, 7 |, 8 9、, 0乙,分别与 (一〗 )组合;每个数码均加 1即为其正列指法图 4的数序笔画码元;五笔码元的布局更有规 律,更好记忆。因此,如果一个五笔码元字根的次笔画为 I、 、或乙,则使用左区字根首笔画的 数码输入其数序简码;如果一个五笔码元字根的次笔画为一或〗,则使用右区字根首笔画的数 码输入其数序简码。  Figure 5 and Figure 4 five-stroke symbol layout, oblique column fingering Figure 3 number sequence root symbol is: 1 child and township, 2 vertical fire, 3 white gold, 4 days Tianshan, 5 soil woodworking, 6 Wang Da , 7 head mouth, 8 wo month, 9 words water, 0 has female; each number is added 1 is the number of the root symbol of its positive index. The number of stroke symbols combined with the first stroke and the second stroke of the five-character radical can be reduced respectively. Figure 3 is: 1 B, 2, 3 J, 4 I, 5-, respectively combined with ( |, B); and 6-, 7 |, 8 9,, 0 B, respectively, combined with (a); Adding 1 to each digit is the numbered stroke symbol of Figure 4 of its positive column fingering; the layout of the five-stroke symbol is more regular and better memory. Therefore, if the substroke of a five-character radical is I, , or B, then the digits of the first stroke of the left radical are used to enter the numbered shortcode; if the secondary stroke of a five-character radical is one or , use the digital input of the first stroke of the right area to input its sequence short code.
图 5和图 6的五笔码元布局,斜列指法图 5的数序字根码元为: 1女又乡, 2水火之, 3月人 金, 4口田山, 5大木工, 6王土, 7目日, 8禾白, 9言立, 0已子;每个数码均加 1即为其正列指法 图 6的数序字根码元。 可以简化为五笔码元字根的首笔画与次笔画组合的数序笔画码元。 图 5的数序笔画码元为: 1乙, 2、,3 J,4 |,5—,分别与(J 、乙)组合;以及 6—, 7 | , 8 J , 9 、, 0乙,分别与 (一 I ) 组合;每个数码均加 1即为其正列指法图 6的数序笔画码元。 因此, 如果一个五笔码元字根的次笔画为〗、、或乙,则使用左区字根首笔画的数码输入其数序简码; 如果一个五笔码元字根的次笔画为一或 I,则使用右区字根首笔画的数码输入其数序简码。  Figure 5 and Figure 6 five-stroke symbol layout, oblique column fingering The number of the root-sequence symbol of Figure 5 is: 1 female and township, 2 water fire, March gold, 4 Tianshan, 5 woodworking, 6 king soil , 7 mesh day, 8 Wo white, 9 words, 0 have children; each number is added to 1 is its positive column fingering the numerical sequence root symbol of Figure 6. It can be simplified to the number of stroke symbols combined with the first stroke and the second stroke of the five-stroke root. The sequenced stroke symbols of Figure 5 are: 1 B, 2, 3 J, 4 |, 5 -, respectively combined with (J, B); and 6-, 7 |, 8 J, 9,, 0 B, They are combined with (I) respectively; each digit is incremented by 1 to be the sequenced stroke symbol of Figure 6 of its positive column fingering. Therefore, if the secondary stroke of a five-character radical is 〖, , or B, the digits of the first stroke of the left radical are used to input the sequence short code; if the secondary stroke of a five-character radical is one or I , use the digital input of the first stroke of the right area to input its sequence short code.
依据图 3与图 4、 图 5与图 6的码元布局规律,可以设计出类似的其它的五笔码元布局。 例如,图 3与图 4、 或图 5与图 6,左区、 右区、 或左区和右区的基准键行与其上一行,每一列 的字符键所指定的五笔码元互换键位,即成为新的列笔画五笔码元布局的多个实施例。  According to the symbol layout rule of FIG. 3 and FIG. 4, FIG. 5 and FIG. 6, similar other five-stroke symbol layouts can be designed. For example, in FIG. 3 and FIG. 4, or FIG. 5 and FIG. 6, the reference key row of the left zone, the right zone, or the left zone and the right zone and the previous row, the five-character symbol exchange key specified by the character key of each column That is, it becomes a plurality of embodiments of the new pen stroke five-character layout.
使用上述任意一个五笔码元布局的数序字根码元,每输入一个五笔码元,所输入的编码依 次与数序字根码元的每个数码码元组合,依次选取所对应目标字符集中实用频度较高的单字 或单字词,指定为每个数码对应的数序简码。 实际上是把每一列的全部码元,分别与所输入的 编码进行组合,来指定每个数码的数序简码,即本来每个字符键的码元都单独参与编码,在指 定数序简码时,每一列 3个字符键的码元合并为数码字根码元,或简化为数码笔画码元,组成 数序字根码元或数序笔画码元,再作为此前所输入编码的附加编码而指定其数序简码。  Using the numbered root symbol of any one of the above five pen symbol layouts, each input of five pen symbols, the input code is sequentially combined with each digital symbol of the number sequence root symbol, and the corresponding target character set is sequentially selected. A single word or a single word with a higher practical frequency is specified as a sequence short code corresponding to each number. In fact, all the symbols of each column are combined with the input codes to specify the digital sequence short code of each digital, that is, the symbols of each character key are separately involved in the coding, and the number sequence is specified. When the code is coded, the symbols of each column of three character keys are combined into a digital root symbol, or simplified into a digital stroke symbol, which constitutes a sequence root symbol or a sequence of stroke symbols, and then is added as a previously input code. Encode and specify its sequence short code.
五笔输入法是最为普及的形码输入法,因此,可以使用上述任意一个改进的五笔码元布局, 把五笔输入法的码表中每个码元的编码字符替换为新的编码字符,一般是先替换为对应的双 字符的大写字符,都完成后再一次性地替换为单字符的小写、 大写字符,即可得到新五笔码元 布局的字词码表,编制出相应的汉字编码输入软件程序即可实施。随后可以利用前述的在每一 列字符待输入的、 高一级别现有简码中选择数序简码的方法,指定其数序简码。  The Wubi input method is the most popular form-code input method. Therefore, you can use any of the above-mentioned improved five-stroke symbol layouts to replace the coded characters of each symbol in the code table of the Wubi input method with new code characters. First replace it with the corresponding two-character uppercase characters, and then replace them with single-character lowercase and uppercase characters once, and then get the new five-symbol layout word code table, and compile the corresponding Chinese character encoding input software. The program can be implemented. The number sequence short code can then be specified by the method of selecting the number sequence short code in the high level one existing short code to be input in each column character.
改进后的图 3-6的五笔码元布局,每一列字符键所指定的五笔码元,具有相同的码元字根 的首笔画,因此其合并后的数码码元,都可以简化为同一个码元字根的首笔画、 与不同的码元 字根的次笔画的组合,数序码元与每个数码的对应关系,简化为码元字根的首笔画与其数码的 对应关系,因为一个数码对应一个码元字根的首笔画。但仍然有一些缺陷:五笔码元字根的次 笔画一部分在左区,另一部分在右区,使五笔码元字根的首笔画也划分为左区和右区,还是比 较凌乱。 这是形码输入法的固有特点所决定的,因为形码码元只能进一步地拆分为笔画,如果 拆分为 10个左右的笔画,则一个数码对应一个笔画,对应关系会更好,但与其组合的另一个笔 画却不能多于 3组,否则就没有更多的字符键可以指定多余的笔画。 可见, 5个首笔画与 5个 次笔画还是比较均衡的字根拆分方式,这也是本发明使用"五笔字型"代表形码输入法的原因, 因为其它形码的码元布局更不合理、 规律性更差。 The improved five-character symbol layout of Figure 3-6, the five stroke symbols specified by each column of character keys have the first stroke of the same symbol root, so the combined digital symbols can be simplified to the same The combination of the first stroke of the symbol root and the secondary stroke of the different symbol root, the correspondence between the digital symbol and each digit is simplified to the correspondence between the first stroke of the symbol root and its number, because one The number corresponds to the first stroke of a symbol root. However, there are still some defects: the second stroke of the five-character root is part of the left area, and the other part is in the right area, so that the first stroke of the five-character root is also divided into the left and right areas, which is still relatively messy. This is determined by the inherent characteristics of the shape code input method, because the shape code symbol can only be further split into strokes, if Split into 10 strokes, then a number corresponds to a stroke, the correspondence will be better, but the other stroke can not be more than 3 groups, otherwise there are no more character keys to specify extra strokes. It can be seen that the five first strokes and the five secondary strokes are still relatively balanced root splitting methods, which is also the reason why the invention uses the "five-stroke type" to represent the shape code input method, because the symbol layout of other shape codes is more unreasonable. The regularity is even worse.
最能发挥数序简码技术优势的是音码汉字编码输入法,因为音码码元可以很容易地拆分 或合并,尤其是介韵母所拆分的单韵母,其数量是 12个,与数码的数量恰好匹配。 声调符号只 有 4、 5个,两组声调也不过 10个,也与数码的数量相接近,在需要的时候输入声调,不需要的 时候则无需输入声调,可以充分地利用数序简码作为附加编码的主要特点。  The most advantageous advantage of the digital sequence short code technology is the audio code Chinese character encoding input method, because the audio code symbols can be easily split or merged, especially the single finals split by the finals, the number is 12, and The number of numbers just matches. There are only 4 or 5 tone symbols, and the tone of the two groups is only 10, which is similar to the number of digits. When you need it, you can input the tone. If you don't need it, you don't need to input the tone. You can make full use of the sequence shortcode as an additional. The main features of the code.
音码汉字编码输入法,就是把目标汉字词语的读音音节符号,拆分为汉语表音符号,再分 别编码输入而还原为汉字词语。 只需使用一部分数序码元即其子集,即可指定其数序简码,因 此更为简化。 例如声母,音码输入法总是作为每个单字读音的第一个码元而输入,在词编码中 也是不可缺少的主要码元,并不用于数序简码,因此可以在数序码元中直接舍弃。  The code-coded Chinese character code input method divides the phonetic syllable symbols of the target Chinese words into Chinese phonetic symbols, and then converts them into Chinese characters according to the code input. Simply use a subset of the numbered symbols, a subset of them, to specify their numbering shortcodes, which is much simpler. For example, the initials, the audio code input method is always input as the first symbol of each single-word pronunciation, and is also an indispensable main symbol in the word coding, and is not used for the digital sequence short code, so it can be in the digital sequence symbol. Directly abandoned.
本发明的所有音码汉字编码输入法,都是依据汉字的普通话标准读音,其中多音字依据汉 字在特定非单字词中的标准读音,进行编码和输入的。 汉字读音的声、 介、 韵、 调的信息,简 称为汉字的声、 介、 韵、 调,一律视为汉字的基本信息,以下均省略 "读音"二字。  All of the code-coded Chinese character encoding input methods of the present invention are based on the Mandarin standard pronunciation of Chinese characters, wherein the multi-tone words are encoded and input according to the standard pronunciation of the Chinese characters in a specific non-single word. The sound, mediation, rhyme, and tune information of Chinese characters are simply referred to as the basic information of Chinese characters, such as sound, media, rhyme, and tone. The words "reading" are omitted below.
音码码元可以使用汉语拼音符号或注音符号,或现有技术 1的汉语音母符号,图 1和图 2 是其符号对照表,其中汉语音母符号是首选的符号。本发明以更精确、更严格和更通用的汉语 表音符号的概念为基础,与汉语拼音或注音符号的某些概念有所区别:不包括双声母的声母为 单声母,单介母不但包括介母 i、 u和 U,还包括双声母中的 "h"、 zhu、 shu、 chu中可简化为 "v"的 "hu";声介母包括单声母、及单声母与单介母的所有有效组合,也包括双声母及 zhu、 shu、 chu ;不与单声母组合、 单独作声母的介母 i、 u和 U依次改写为 y、 w和 yu,视为特殊的 单声母和介母;没有声母的音节,其声母视为零声母,使用单引号 "' "代表;介韵母和韵母需 严格区分: 汉语拼音的韵母实际是介韵母。 无介母的韵母称作单韵母,但介韵母包括单韵母, 视为无介母的介韵母;不与韵母组合、 单独做韵母的介母 i、 u和 U称作零韵母,区分声调的零 韵母则是声调相同的标调介母 i、 u和 U的组合,可使用其声调符号代表。  The phonetic symbols can use Chinese pinyin symbols or phonetic symbols, or the Chinese phonetic symbols of the prior art 1, and Figures 1 and 2 are their symbol comparison tables, wherein the Chinese alphabet symbols are preferred symbols. The present invention is based on the concept of more accurate, stricter and more general Chinese phonetic symbols, and differs from some concepts of Chinese pinyin or phonetic symbols: the initials that do not include double initials are monophonic, and the single mother includes not only The mediators i, u and U also include the "hu" in "h", zhu, shu, chu in the double initials, which can be simplified to "v"; the acoustic mediator includes a monophonic mother, and a monophonic and a single mother. All valid combinations, including double initials and zhu, shu, chu; mediators i, u, and U that are not combined with monophonic mothers and are used as initials, are rewritten as y, w, and yu, respectively, as special monophonic and mediators. There is no initial syllable, the initial is regarded as zero initial, and the single quotation mark "'" is used; the vowel and the final are strictly distinguished: the final of the Chinese pinyin is actually the vowel. The vowel without the mother is called a single vowel, but the vowel includes a single vowel, which is regarded as a vowel without a mother; the combination of the vowels, i, u and U, which are not combined with the vowel, is called zero vowel, which distinguishes the tone. The zero vowel is a combination of the same tone tuner i, u and U, which can be represented by its tone symbol.
无论是全拼、简拼还是双拼,都可以使用输入效率更高、直接指定在数码行的数序单声调 或双声调,和 /或使用直接指定在数码行的数序单韵母;或者只针对现有技术 1的双拼码元布 局,把每一列字符键所指定的单韵母相同的介韵母,合并为单韵母并指定在数码行,因此这种 单韵母实际是尚未区分介母的单韵母,是本发明特别约定的特殊概念的单韵母。 因此,在数码 行直接指定的数序单声调或双声调,以及在数码行直接指定的、 或介韵母合并的数序单韵母, 是音码汉字编码输入法的数序码元,以下分别进行详细地说明。  Whether it is full spelling, simple spelling or double spelling, you can use a single-single tone or double tone that is more efficient in input, directly specified in the digital line, and/or use a single-sequence single-final directly specified in the digital line; or For the double-composition symbol layout of the prior art 1, the same final vowels of the single finals specified by each column of character keys are combined into a single final and are designated in the digital line, so the single final is actually a single unconformed single. The final is a single vowel of the special concept specifically agreed by the present invention. Therefore, the sequence-order single tone or double tone directly specified in the digital line, and the sequence-single-single vouchers directly designated in the digital line or merged with the vowels are the sequence-sequence symbols of the vocoding Chinese character coding input method, respectively Explain in detail.
本发明使用输入效率最高的双手食指击键的数码输入声调,即阴平、 阳平、上声和去声的 声调符号,针对斜列指法依次指定在 4、 5、 6、 7的数码键上,或针对正列指法依次指定在 5、 6、 7、 8的数码键上,以便大幅度地提高声调符号的输入效率,称作数序单声调。 图 3-6的数 码行都是其实施例。  The invention uses the digital input tone of the finger input keystroke with the highest input efficiency, that is, the tone symbols of the Yinping, Yangping, Shangsheng and the de-sounding, and sequentially designates the digital keys of 4, 5, 6, and 7 for the oblique column fingering, or For the positive column fingering, the numeric keys of 5, 6, 7, and 8 are sequentially designated to greatly improve the input efficiency of the tone symbols, which is called a digital sequence single tone. The code lines of Figures 3-6 are all examples.
或者,把实用频度降序排列的声调符号,即去声、 阴平、 阳平和上声,分别指定在左手的食 指、 中指、 无名指和小指依次击键的数码键上,可称作左声调;以及右手的食指、 中指、 无名 指和小指依次击键的数码键上,可称作右声调。 即针对斜列指法,分别指定在 5、 4、 3、 2、 1 的数码键上,以及 6、 7、 8、 9、 0的数码键上;而针对正列指法,分别指定在 6、 5、 4、 3、 2 的数码键上,以及 7、 8、 9、 0、 "-"的数码键上。 或进一步地把所有声调合并为零声调,分别 指定在输入效率较高的、左手和右手的两个数码键上。指定零声调与否的两种双声调,统称为 数序双声调。 指定零声调的目的,是为了更充分地利用数码,避免浪费数码的编码资源;并且 不区分声调的音节即声介韵,在现有技术中普遍应用,是音码汉字编码输入法最重要的汉字信 息之一,通常都指定其简码,因此,增加零声调可以更好地包容现有技术,更何况中国的南方 人识别声调又比较困难。 图 24是斜列指法的数序双声调的一个实施例,图 25则是图 24对应 的正列指法的实施例;图 26是斜列指法的数序双声调的另一个实施例,图 27则是图 26对应 的正列指法的实施例。 斜列指法图 24的数码 5和 6、 或图 26的数码 4和 7,正列指法图 25 的数码 6和 7、 或图 27的数码 5和 8,可以分别空缺或分别指定为零声调。 Alternatively, the tonal symbols arranged in descending order of the practical frequency, that is, the de-sounding, the yin-flat, the yangping, and the upper-sounding are respectively designated on the digital keys of the index finger, the middle finger, the ring finger and the little finger of the left hand, respectively, and may be referred to as a left tone; The right-handed index finger, middle finger, ring finger and little finger are used to press the key on the digital key, which can be called the right tone. That is, for the oblique column fingering, respectively, on the numeric keys of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 and the numeric keys of 6, 7, 8, 9, 0; and for the positive indexing, respectively, specified in 6, 5 , 4, 3, 2 on the digital keys, and 7, 8, 9, 0, "-" on the digital keys. Or further combine all the tones into zero tones, respectively designated on the two input keys with higher input efficiency, left hand and right hand. Two double tones that specify zero tonality or not, collectively Digital double tone. The purpose of specifying zero tone is to make full use of the digital, avoiding wasting digital coding resources; and not distinguishing the syllables of the tones, that is, the sounds, which are commonly used in the prior art, is the most important of the coded Chinese character encoding input method. One of the Chinese character information usually specifies its short code. Therefore, adding zero tone can better accommodate the existing technology, not to mention the difficulty of identifying southern Chinese tones. Figure 24 is an embodiment of a sequenced double tone of the oblique column fingering, Figure 25 is an embodiment of the positive column fingering of Figure 24; Figure 26 is another embodiment of a sequenced double tone of the oblique column fingering, Figure 27 This is an embodiment of the positive-column fingering corresponding to FIG. The oblique index refers to the numbers 5 and 6 of Fig. 24, or the numbers 4 and 7 of Fig. 26, the digits 6 and 7 of the positive fingering map 25, or the numerals 5 and 8 of Fig. 27, which may be vacant or respectively designated as zero tones.
无论是数序单声调还是数序双声调,轻声声调都可以指定在未占用的、输入效率较低的数 码键上,或轻声与阴平或去声合并而无需指定轻声的数码。  Whether it is a single-order single tone or a digital sequence double tone, the soft tone can be specified on an unoccupied, input-inefficient digital key, or softly combined with a flat or de-sound without specifying a soft digital.
指定数序单声调或双声调之后,无论是全拼、 简拼还是双拼的汉字编码输入法,也无论其 字符或码元的布局如何,都可以采用下述的字符编码附加数序码元的数序简码输入方法: 输入任一声介韵编码之后,附加待输入的数序单声调,组成数序的声介韵调,所对应的数 序目标汉字中,选取实用频度较高的一组或多组,每组最多 6个单字或单字词,分别指定在数 序单声调的数码键上;并且选取所对应的相同声介韵的、 实用频度较高的其它单字或单字词, 指定在其它数码键上;在数码行指定并且提示一组或多组数序的音节简码字,下次击键使用数 序单声调的任一数码,直接输入其音节简码字,或使用其它数码输入所提示的音节简码字,从 而结束该进程,称作声介韵编码附加数序单声调的数序简码字输入模式;  After specifying a single-single tone or a double tone, whether it is a full-spelling, simple-spelling or double-spelling Chinese character encoding input method, and regardless of the layout of characters or symbols, the following character encoding can be used to add a numerical sequence number symbol. The digital sequence short code input method: After inputting any sound and medium rhyme coding, the number sequence single tone to be input is added, and the sound sequence of the sequence is composed, and the corresponding numerical order target Chinese character is selected, and the practical frequency is selected. One or more groups, each group of up to 6 words or single words, respectively designated on the digital key of the single-order single tone; and select the other words or singles of the same sound medium with higher practical frequency Words, specified on other digital keys; specify and prompt one or more sets of syllable short code words in the digital line, the next keystroke uses any number of single-order single tone, directly input its syllable short code word , or using other syllabic short code words prompted by the digital input, thereby ending the process, referred to as a sound-synchronized code-added number-single-tone single-sequence short code word input mode;
或者,输入任一声介韵编码之后,附加待输入的数序双声调,组成两组数序的声介韵调;一 组数序声调指定并且提示数序的音节简码字,另一组数序声调指定并且提示数序的音节符号; 下次击键使用双声调的任一数码,直接输入其音节简码字或音节符号而结束该进程;或进一步 地提示所输入音节符号的一组或多组、 每组最多 12个实用频度较高的同音字,再一次击键使 用任一数码输入所提示的同音字再结束该进程,统称为声介韵编码附加数序双声调的数序简 码音字输入模式。在输入任意一个汉语音节符号之后,选择该音节中实用频度较高的一组或多 组,每组最多 12个单字或单字词,依据其实用频度的降序排列,依次指定在右食指、 左食指、 右中指、左中指、右无名指、左无名指、右小指、左小指的数码键位上;或依据此前击键的手 指与待输入数码的手指之间击键效率的降序,依次指定其实用频度降序的单字或单字词,也可 称作声介韵调编码附加序号的数序简码字输入模式,使用所提示的数码键直接输入。  Alternatively, after inputting any of the phonological codes, the sequenced double tones to be input are added to form two sets of sequenced phonological tones; a set of sequenced tones specifies and prompts the syllabic syllabic words of the sequence, and the other set of numbers The tonal tone specifies and prompts the syllable symbol of the sequence; the next keystroke uses any number of double tones, directly inputting its syllable short code word or syllable symbol to end the process; or further prompting a group of input syllable symbols or Multiple groups, each group of up to 12 homophones with higher practical frequency. Once again, use the homophones prompted by any digital input to end the process, which is collectively referred to as the sequence of the number of double-tones. Short code audio input mode. After inputting any Chinese syllable symbol, select one or more groups with higher practical frequency in the syllable, each group of up to 12 single words or single words, according to the descending order of their practical frequency, and then specify the right index finger in turn. , the left index finger, the middle middle finger, the left middle finger, the right ring finger, the left ring finger, the right little finger, the left little finger on the digital key position; or according to the descending order of the keystroke efficiency between the finger of the previous keystroke and the finger to be input, sequentially designate The single-word or single-word word whose practical frequency is descending can also be called the digital-sequence short-coded word input mode of the sound-synchronized coded additional serial number, and is directly input by using the prompted digital key.
数序双声调比数序单声调更有优势,同时指定两组声调符号,一组声调符号输入音节简码 字,可以更高效率地输入每个音节最常用的单字,而另一组声调符号输入音节符号,比较适合 汉语的初学者,不需要切换输入模式即可交互地输入汉字及其音节符号;或者进一步地提示所 输入音节符号的同音字,采用传统的数码选字输入方式,输入更多的同音字。  The digital sequence double tone is more advantageous than the single tone. At the same time, two sets of tone symbols are specified. One set of tone symbols is input into the syllable short code words, which can input the most commonly used words of each syllable more efficiently, and another set of tone symbols. Input syllables, suitable for beginners in Chinese, can input Chinese characters and their syllables interactively without switching the input mode; or further prompt the homophones of the input syllables, using the traditional digital selection input method, input more More homophones.
如果限定最多输入一个字的编码,则结束该进程,到此为止的字符编码附加数序码元的数 序简码输入方法,统称为字符编码附加数序声调的数序简码音字输入方法。  If the encoding of a maximum of one word is limited, the process ends, and the method of inputting the sequence code of the character code-added number-sequence symbol up to this point is collectively referred to as the number-sequence short-coded word input method of the character code-added number-order tone.
或进一步地,输入任意两个声介韵编码之后,所输入的双声介韵视为双音词,无论是否重 码,每个双音词及其首字、 尾字依次组成词字序列;依据此前击键的手指与待输入数码的手指 组合击键效率的降序,在数码行依次指定一组或多组总的实用频度降序的词字序列;使用所提 示的数码输入任一双音词、或其任一单字而结束该进程,称作双声介韵编码附加序号的数序简 码词字输入模式。 在后续的实施方式中,有详细地具体说明。  Or further, after inputting any two audio and rhyme codes, the input two-syllable rhyme is regarded as a double-syllable word, and whether or not the double-word is repeated, each double-syllable word and its first word and the last word form a sequence of word words; Deducing the keystroke efficiency of the keystroke finger and the finger to be input digitally, sequentially designating one or more sets of total practical frequency descending word sequence in the digital line; using the prompted digital input any two-syllable word, or The process ends with any one of the words, and is called a double-sequence coded additional numbered sequence-simplified code word input mode. In the subsequent embodiments, it is described in detail.
由于既可输入词,也可输入词中的单字,只要词字数序简码覆盖了常用单字,就可以盲打 输入常用单字,从而彻底地解决音码输入法普遍存在的单字需选择输入的难题,无需拆字即可 简便、快捷地输入单字。形码输入法盲打输入单字不再是独有的优势,音码与形码的主要差距 得以消除,必将大幅度地提升音码的地位。 但是,全拼和简拼的输入法,输入效率都很低,是音 码用户无奈的选择。 只有双拼输入法的词字数序简码,才能最大限度地发挥其优势。 Since both the input word and the single word in the word can be input, as long as the word size short code covers the commonly used single word, the commonly used single word can be blindly input, thereby completely solving the problem that the single word that is commonly used in the audio code input method needs to be input. You can enter single words easily and quickly without disassembling the words. The shape code input method blindly typing the input word is no longer a unique advantage, the main difference between the code and the shape code Can be eliminated, will greatly enhance the status of the code. However, the input method of full spelling and simple spelling has low input efficiency, which is a helpless choice for audio code users. Only the word-simplification of the double-spelling input method can maximize its advantages.
如果限定最多输入两个字的编码,则结束该进程,到此为止的字符编码附加数序码元的数 序简码输入方法,统称为字符编码附加数序声调的数序简码字词输入方法。  If the encoding of the maximum input of two words is limited, the process ends, and the character encoding short-coded short code input method of the character encoding additional number-sequence symbol up to this point is collectively referred to as the character-coded short-coded short word input of the character encoding additional sequenced tone. method.
上述音码汉字编码输入方法,是技术方案 4的实施方式,其具体实施方式即声介韵的输入 方法,包括单声母、 双声母、 介母、 单韵母依次分别输入的技术方案 5,单声母、 单介母和单 韵母依次分别输入的技术方案 6,以及声母、 介韵母依次分别输入的技术方案 7。 这三种技术 方案,输入任一声介韵,击键次数可以依次减少为 4、 3、 2,可依次称作四拼、 三拼和双拼。其 中的四拼对应现有技术的全拼,本来最多击键 6次才能输入任一声介韵,由于本发明在数码行 直接指定了单韵母,最多 3个字母的单韵母可以使用 1个数码代替,所以可以减少为四拼,也 可称作简拼;其中的三拼是声介母组合输入再附加一个数码的单韵母,而双拼则直接指定双声 母的键位并且把介母和单韵母组合为介韵母再输入,击键次数都可以减少。以下分别说明这三 种技术方案的具体实施方式。  The above-mentioned audio code Chinese character encoding input method is an implementation manner of the technical solution 4, and the specific implementation manner thereof is an input method of the acoustic medium rhyme, including the technical solutions 5, single initial, single initial, double initial, single final, respectively input, single initial , the single mediation and the single finals are respectively input into the technical solution 6, and the initials and the finals are respectively input into the technical solution 7. These three technical schemes, input any sound, the number of keystrokes can be reduced to 4, 3, 2, which can be called four spells, three spells and double spells. The four spells correspond to the full spell of the prior art. Originally, the maximum number of keystrokes can be input 6 times to input any rhyme. Since the invention directly assigns a single final in the digital line, a single vowel of up to 3 letters can be replaced by 1 digit. , so it can be reduced to four spells, which can also be called Jane spells; the three spells are the sound masterbatch combination input and then add a digital single vowel, while the double spells directly specify the double initials and the master and the single The combination of the finals is the input of the finals, and the number of keystrokes can be reduced. The specific implementation of these three technical solutions will be respectively described below.
采用全拼或简拼的任意一种汉字编码输入法,单次或双次击键输入双声母,介母和单韵母 依次分别输入,最多击键三次输入一个声介母,即为技术方案 5。 除直接指定在数码行的数序 单声调或双声调以及数序单韵母之外,使用所述任一字母键盘的英文字符,指定汉语音母符号, 或转换为汉语拼音或注音符号,不受字符布局的限制。 其具体实施方式如下所述:  Any Chinese character encoding input method using full spelling or simple spelling, single or double keystroke input double initials, mediator and single finals are input separately, and a maximum of three keystrokes are input into one acoustic medium, which is technical scheme 5 . In addition to directly specifying the digital single-tone or double-tone and digital single-final in the digital line, use the English characters of any of the alphabetic keyboards, specify the Chinese initial symbol, or convert to Chinese pinyin or phonetic symbols, not Character layout restrictions. The specific implementation is as follows:
依据数码的输入效率和单韵母的实用频度,在数码行直接指定数序的单韵母,可以采用斜 列指法的图 3、 或正列指法图 4的数码行所指定的数序单韵母,或采用斜列指法的图 5、 或正 列指法图 6的数码行所指定的数序单韵母,或把现有技术 1的每一列字符键所指定的单韵母, 也指定在同指击键的数码键上组成数序单韵母;或进一步地在基准键行或其上一行、同指击键 字符键上也指定单韵母称作字符单韵母,例如可以直接采用图 3-10的基准键上一行的单韵母, 或使用现有技术 1的单行字符键上所指定的单韵母,如果不使用字符单韵母则无需指定。或者 进一步地指定所述的数序单声调或双声调而组成数序韵调母,如果不使用声调符号则无需指 定。 采用下述的任意一种字符编码附加数序码元的数序简码输入方法:  According to the input efficiency of the digital and the practical frequency of the single final, the single vowel of the numerical order can be directly specified in the digital line, and the numerical sequence single vowel specified by the digital line of the oblique line fingering of FIG. 3 or the positive index fingering can be used. Or the single-final vowel specified by the numerical row of Figure 6 or the positive-column fingering of Figure 6 or the single-final specified by each column of the character keys of prior art 1, also specified in the same finger-clicking key The digital key constitutes a sequence single vowel; or further, the single vowel is also referred to as a character single vowel on the reference key line or the previous line, and the same keystroke key, for example, the reference key of FIG. 3-10 can be directly used. The single vowel of the previous line, or the single vowel specified on the one-line character key of the prior art 1, does not need to be specified if the character single vowel is not used. Or further specifying the sequence-single tone or double tone to form a sequence of tone tones, if no tone symbols are used, no need to specify. A digital sequence short code input method using any one of the following character encoding additional number sequential symbols:
首次击键输入首字单声母, zh与 z、 sh与 s、 ch与 c分别合并,或另行指定双声母 zh、 sh、 ch的键位,从而首次击键也输入首字双声母,否则击键两次输入首字双声母;每输入一个字母, 所输入的单声母或双声母,附加待输入的数序单韵母,组成数序的声韵,每个声韵及其声韵中 包含 i、 u和 U的所有声介韵,所对应的数序目标汉字中,选取一组或多组、 每组最多 12个实 用频度较高的单字或单字词,依次使用单韵母的数码,在数码行指定并且提示一组或多组数序 的声韵简码字,下次击键使用数序单韵母的任一数码,直接输入其声韵简码字而结束该进程, 称作声母编码附加数序单韵母的数序简码字输入模式。图 21就是斜列指法的声韵简码字的一 个具体实施例,把每个数码分别下移一位即分别加 1,就是其正列指法的相应实施例;或者分 别把单韵母 " e"和 " eng"及其所对应的声韵简码字互换键位,即为声韵简码字的另一个实 施例。 如果 211与2、 sh与 s、 ch与 c分别合并,可称作 "声母的南方音输入方式",可以把 211与2、 811与8、 ch与 c的各组中实用频度较高的汉字指定为合并后的声韵简码字,或者舍 弃全部单声母的声韵简码字,或者舍弃全部双声母的声韵简码字。 The first key input enters the first word single initial, zh and z, sh and s, ch and c are respectively combined, or separately specify the key of the double initial zh, sh, ch, so that the first keystroke is also input the first double initial, otherwise Press the key twice to input the first word double initials; each input one letter, the input single initial or double initial, add the sequenced single vowel to be input, form the sequence of the rhyme, each rhyme and its rhyme contains i, u and All the sounds of U, the corresponding number of target Chinese characters, select one or more groups, each group of up to 12 single words or single words with higher practical frequency, using the single vowel digital in turn, in the digital line Specify and prompt one or more sets of sequence rhythm short code words, the next keystroke uses any number of the sequence single vowel, directly input its vowel short code word and end the process, called the initial coded additional number order The final code of the finals is a short code word input mode. Figure 21 is a specific embodiment of the syllabic codeword of the oblique column fingering. Each digit is shifted down by one, that is, 1 is added respectively, which is the corresponding embodiment of the positive column fingering; or the single vowel "e" and "eng" and its corresponding phonological short code word exchange key, which is another embodiment of the phonological short code word. If 2 11 and 2 , sh and s, ch and c are respectively combined, it can be called "the southern sound input method of the initials", and the practical frequency of each group of 2 11 and 2 , 811 and 8 , ch and c can be compared. The high Chinese characters are designated as the combined shorthand words of the arpeggio, or the abbreviated short code words of all the single initials are discarded, or the shorthand words of all the double initials are discarded.
如果此前并未输入数码,则进一步地输入首字介母,从而最多击键三次输入首字声介母; 附加待输入的数序单韵母,组成数序的声介韵,所对应的数序目标汉字中,选取一组或多组、 每组最多 12个实用频度较高的单字或单字词,在数码行指定并提示一组或多组数序的声介韵 简码字,下次击键使用单韵母的任一数码,直接输入其声介韵简码字而结束该进程,称作声介 母编码附加数序单韵母的数序简码字输入模式。 声介韵简码字也就是所有 "无调音节"所指 定的 400多个简码字,现有音码汉字编码输入法都有所涉及,不再详述。 If the number has not been input before, the first word mother is further input, so that the first word initial is input by the maximum number of keystrokes; the numbered single vowel to be input is added, and the sound sequence of the sequence is composed, and the corresponding numerical order In the target Chinese character, select one or more groups, each group of up to 12 single words or single words with higher practical frequency, and specify and prompt one or more sets of sound sequence rhyme code words in the digital line. The second keystroke uses any number of single vowels, directly inputting its vocal code and ending the process, called sound mediation. The mother code adds a sequence-single-single-single-single-simplified codeword input mode. The audio code word is the more than 400 short code words specified by all "no syllables". The existing code code Chinese character code input method is involved and will not be described in detail.
如果此前并未输入数码,则可以进一步地,使用字符单韵母的任一字符,输入首字的声介 韵;采用所述的声介韵编码附加数序单声调的数序简码字输入模式,直接输入任一音节简码字 而结束该进程;或采用所述的声介韵编码附加数序双声调的数序简码音字输入模式,直接输入 任一音节简码字或音节符号而结束该进程;或进一步地输入所输入音节符号的任一同音字,再 结束该进程;或者省略该步骤,不使用声调符号,仅使用上一步骤输入单字。  If the number has not been input before, the character of the first word can be further input by using any character of the character single vowel; and the number sequence simple word input mode of the numbered single tone is added by using the sound phonological code. , directly input any syllable short code word to end the process; or use the sound phonological code to add a sequenced double tone digital sequence short code sound word input mode, directly input any syllable short code word or syllable symbol and end The process; or further inputting any homophone of the input syllable symbol, and then ending the process; or omitting the step, without using the tone symbol, using only the previous step to input the word.
如果限定最多输入一个字的编码,则结束该进程,到此为止的字符编码附加数序码元的数 序简码输入方法,统称为声母编码附加数序韵调母的数序简码字输入方法。  If the encoding of the maximum input of one word is limited, the process ends, and the character encoding short-coded short-code input method of the character encoding additional number-sequence symbol is used, which is collectively referred to as the initial-coded short-coded mother-in-law. method.
如果没有限定最多输入一个字的编码,则可以进一步地,输入次字单声母或双声母,所输 入的声介韵与声母编码,附加待输入的数序单韵母,组成数序的声介韵与声韵,每个声介韵与 声韵、 及其声韵中包含1、 u和 U的所有声介韵与声介韵,所对应的数序目标双音词中,选取一 组或多组、 每组最多 12个实用频度较高的双音词,在数码行指定并且提示一组或多组数序的 声介韵与声韵简码双音词,下次击键使用次字单韵母的任一数码,直接输入其简码双音词而结 束该进程,称作声介韵与声母编码附加数序单韵母的数序简码词输入模式。从而把最常用的几 千个双音词指定为简码双音词,避免在后续双声介韵编码附加序号的数序简码词字输入模式 中才可输入,以便提高其输入效率。 具体的输入方法,参见后续实施例的详细说明。  If there is no code that limits the input of at most one word, you can further input the sub-word initial or double initial, the input sound and the initial code, and add the sequence-single vowel to be input to form the sequence of the sound. With the rhyme, each sound and rhyme, and its rhyme contains all the sounds and sounds of 1, u and U, corresponding to the number of target two-syllable words, select one or more groups, each A group of up to 12 two-syllable words with higher practical frequency, which are specified in the digital line and suggest one or more sets of sequenced sound and rhyme short coded two-syllable words, and the next keystroke uses the second-word single-final A digital number, directly inputting its short code double-syllable words and ending the process, is called a sound-synchronized rhyme and initial consonant coded number-single-single-single-sequence short-coded word input mode. Therefore, the thousands of double-syllable words that are most commonly used are designated as short-coded double-syllable words, and can be input only in the subsequent digital-sequential short-word word input mode of the double-sound-encoding code to improve the input efficiency. For specific input methods, refer to the detailed description of the subsequent embodiments.
如果此前并未输入数码,则可以输入次字介母,从而输入声介韵与声介母,附加待输入的 数序单韵母,组成数序的声介韵与声介韵,所对应的数序目标双音词中,选取一组或多组实用 频度较高的双音词,在数码行指定并且提示一组或多组数序的声介韵与声介韵简码双音词,下 次击键使用次字单韵母的任一数码,直接输入其简码双音词而结束该进程,称作声介韵与声介 母编码附加数序单韵母的数序简码词输入模式。声介韵与声介韵双音词,实际就是不区分声调 的双音词,是现有技术最常用的词编码方法,不再进一步说明。  If you have not entered the number before, you can input the sub-words, so as to input the sound and the sound, and add the sequenced single vowel to be input, and form the sequence of the sound and the rhyme, the corresponding number. In the two-tone word of the sequence target, one or more sets of two-syllable words with higher practical frequency are selected, and one or more sets of sequenced sounds and sounds are used in the digital line, The next keystroke uses any digit of the second-character single-final, directly inputting its short-coded double-syllables and ending the process, which is called the sound-synchronized and the syllabic code. . The two-syllable words of sound and rhyme and sound are actually two-syllable words that do not distinguish between tones. They are the most commonly used word-coding methods in the prior art and will not be further explained.
如果此前并未输入数码,则可以进一步地,使用字符单韵母任一字符,输入声介韵与声介 韵,采用所述的双声介韵编码附加序号的数序简码词字输入模式,再使用任一数码输入所提示 的双音词、 或其任一单字而结束该进程;或者省略该进程,仅使用上一步骤输入双音词。  If the number has not been input before, it is further possible to use any character of the character single vowel to input the sound and the rhyme, and use the double-tone vowel coding to add the sequence number of the short code word input mode, and then End the process using the two-syllable word suggested by either digital input, or any of its words; or omit the process and use only the previous step to enter the two-syllable word.
如果限定最多输入两个字的编码,则自动结束该进程,到此为止的字符编码附加数序码元 的数序简码输入方法,统称为声母编码附加数序韵调母的数序简码字词输入方法。如果没有限 定最多输入两个字的编码,则可以进一步输入 3、 4、 5或更多个字的声母、声介母和声介韵的 编码,并且不断地附加相应的数序韵调母的数序简码,直至使用任一数码输入简码而结束。  If the encoding of the maximum input of two words is limited, the process is automatically terminated, and the character encoding short-coded short code input method of the character encoding additional numbered symbols is used, which is collectively referred to as the initial sequence of the initials. Word input method. If the encoding of the maximum input of two words is not limited, the encoding of the initials, the acoustic mediator and the acoustic melody of 3, 4, 5 or more words may be further input, and the corresponding numerical order voicing mother is continuously added. The sequence short code ends until any digital input short code is used.
采用全拼或简拼的任意一种汉字编码输入法,首次击键输入单声母,再次击键输入单介母, 最多击键两次输入任一声介母,即为技术方案 6。除直接指定在数码行的数序单声调或双声调 以及数序单韵母之外,也使用所述任一字母键盘的英文字符指定汉语音母符号,或转换为汉语 拼音或注音符号,不受字符布局的限制。 其具体实施方式如下所述:  Use any Chinese character encoding input method of full spelling or simple spelling. Enter the single initials for the first keystroke, input the single mother with the keystroke again, and input any one of the initials by pressing the key twice. In addition to directly specifying the digital single-tone or double-tone and digital single-final in the digital line, the Chinese character of the alphanumeric keyboard is also used to specify the Chinese initial symbol, or converted to Chinese pinyin or phonetic symbol, not subject to Character layout restrictions. The specific implementation is as follows:
一律使用 V代替 "hu",双声母组合输入;依据数码的输入效率和单韵母的实用频度,在数 码行直接指定数序的单韵母,可以采用斜列指法的图 3、或正列指法图 4的数码行所指定的数 序单韵母,或采用斜列指法的图 5、 或正列指法图 6的数码行所指定的数序单韵母,或把现有 技术 1的每一列字符键所指定的单韵母,也指定在同指击键的数码键上组成数序单韵母;或进 一步地在基准键行或其上一行、同指击键字符键上也指定单韵母称作字符单韵母,例如可以直 接采用图 3-10的基准键上一行的单韵母,或使用现有技术 1的单行字符键上所指定的单韵母, 如果不使用字符单韵母则无需指定。 或者进一步地指定所述的数序单声调或双声调而组成数 序韵调母,如果不使用声调符号则无需指定。采用下述的任意一种字符编码附加数序码元的数 序简码输入方法: Always use V instead of "hu", double initial combination input; according to the input efficiency of the digital and the practical frequency of the single final, directly specify the single vowel of the numerical order in the digital line, you can use the oblique column fingering of Figure 3, or the positive column fingering The numerical sequence single vowel specified by the digital line of FIG. 4, or the numerical order single vowel specified by the numerical line of FIG. 5 using the oblique column fingering, or the numerical sequence of the positive row fingering FIG. 6, or each column of the character key of the prior art 1. The specified single final vowel is also specified to form a sequenced single vowel on the digital key of the same keystroke key; or further, a single vowel is also designated as a character list on the reference key row or the same row and the same finger key character key. The finals, for example, can directly adopt the single finals of the previous line of the reference key of Fig. 3-10, or use the single finals specified on the single-line character keys of the prior art 1, and do not need to be specified if the character single finals are not used. Or further specifying the numbered single tone or double tone to form a number The rhyme adjustment, if you do not use the tone symbol, you do not need to specify. A digital sequence short code input method using any one of the following character encoding additional number sequential symbols:
首次击键输入首字单声母,附加待输入的数序单韵母,组成数序的声韵,每个声韵及其声 韵中包含1、 u、 U、 h和 hu或 v的所有声介韵,所对应的数序目标汉字中,选取一组或多组、 每组最多 12个实用频度较高的单字或单字词,在数码行指定并且提示一组或多组数序的声韵 简码字,下次击键使用数序单韵母的任一数码,直接输入其声韵简码字而结束该进程,称作单 声母编码附加数序单韵母的数序简码字输入模式。 与声母编码附加数序单韵母的数序简码字 输入模式不同之处在于,首次击键并未输入双声母,因此图 21中, zh与 z、 sh与 s、 ch与 c的 声韵简码字,或用单声母的、 或用双声母的,或分别合并后选用实用频度高的。  The first keystroke enters the first word single initial, and the numbered single vowel to be input is added to form the sequence rhyme. Each rhyme and its rhyme contains all the sounds of 1, u, U, h and hu or v. Among the corresponding numerical order target Chinese characters, one or more groups, each group of up to 12 single words or single words with higher practical frequency are selected, and one or more sets of sequenced sound rhyming code words are specified in the digital line. The next keystroke uses any number of the single-sequence single-final, directly inputting its acrobatic short-coded word and ends the process, which is called the mono-acoustic coding plus the number-single-single-single-sequence short-coded word input mode. The difference from the number-simplified codeword input mode of the initial sequence of the initials is that the first keystroke does not input the double initial, so in Figure 21, the syllabic codes of zh and z, sh and s, ch and c Words, either with a single initial or with a double initial, or combined separately, with a high practical frequency.
如果此前并未输入数码,则进一步地输入首字单介母,从而最多击键两次输入首字声介母, 附加待输入的数序单韵母,组成数序的声介韵,所对应的数序目标汉字中,选取一组或多组、 每组最多 12个实用频度较高的单字或单字词,在数码行指定并且提示一组或多组数序的声介 韵简码字,下次击键使用单韵母的任一数码,直接输入其声介韵简码字而结束该进程,称作单 声介母编码附加数序单韵母的数序简码字输入模式;  If the digital number has not been input before, the first word single mediator is further input, so that the maximum number of keystrokes is input twice, and the numbered single vowel to be input is added to form a sequence of sounds, corresponding to In the numerical order target Chinese character, select one or more groups, each group of up to 12 single words or single words with higher practical frequency, specify and prompt one or more sets of sequenced sound in the digital line. The next keystroke uses any number of single vowels, directly inputting its syllabic simplification code and ends the process, which is called the monophonic coded additional numbered single vowel of the numbered short code word input mode;
如果此前并未输入数码,则进一步地,使用字符单韵母的任一字符,输入首字声介韵;采用 所述的声介韵编码附加数序单声调的数序简码字输入模式,直接输入任一音节简码字而结束 该进程;或采用所述的声介韵编码附加数序双声调的数序简码音字输入模式,直接输入任一音 节简码字或音节符号而结束该进程;或进一步地输入所输入音节符号的任一同音字,再结束该 进程;或者省略该步骤,不使用声调符号,仅使用上一步骤输入单字。  If the number has not been input before, further, using any character of the character single vowel, input the first word sound; using the sound phonological code to add the numerical order single tone of the digital sequence short code word input mode, directly Entering any syllable short code word to end the process; or using the sound phonological code to add a sequenced double tone digital sequence short code word input mode, directly input any syllable short code word or syllable symbol to end the process Or further input any homophone of the input syllable symbol, and then end the process; or omit this step, without using the tone symbol, use only the previous step to input the word.
如果限定最多输入一个字的编码,则结束该进程,到此为止的字符编码附加数序码元的数 序简码输入方法,统称为单声介母编码附加数序韵调母的数序简码字输入方法;  If the encoding of the maximum input of one word is limited, the process ends, and the number encoding short code input method of the character encoding additional number sequential symbol is used, which is collectively referred to as the number sequence of the monogram-prefixed numbered sequence. Codeword input method;
如果没有限定最多输入一个字的编码,则可以进一步地输入次字单声母,所输入的声介韵 与声母编码,附加待输入的数序单韵母,组成数序的声介韵与声韵,每个声介韵与声韵、 及其 声韵中包含 i、 u、 U、 h和 hu或 v的所有声介韵与声介韵,所对应的数序目标双音词中,选取 一组或多组、 每组最多 12个实用频度较高的双音词,在数码行指定并且提示一组或多组数序 的声介韵与声韵简码双音词,下次击键使用次字单韵母的任一数码,直接输入其简码双音词而 结束该进程,称作单声介韵与单声母编码附加数序单韵母的数序简码词输入模式。即所述的声 介韵与声母编码附加数序单韵母的数序简码词输入模式,仅使用单声母。  If the encoding of the maximum input word is not limited, the sub-word initial can be further input, the input sound and the initial encoding, and the sequence-single vowel to be input is added to form the sequence of the sound and rhyme, each Each of the sounds and rhymes, and their rhymes contain all the sounds and rhymes of i, u, U, h, and hu or v, and the corresponding number of target two-syllable words, one or more groups are selected. Each group of up to 12 double-syllable words with higher practical frequency, which are specified in the digital line and suggest one or more sets of sequenced sound and rhyme short coded double-syllable words, and the next keystroke uses the second-word single-final Any number of digits, directly input its shortcode double-syllable words and end the process, called the monophonic mero-symbol and the mono-acoustic encoding additional sequence-single-single-single-sequence short-coded word input mode. That is to say, the sound meson and the initial coded additional sequenced single finals of the number-simplified code word input mode, using only a single initial.
如果此前并未输入数码,则输入次字单介母,从而输入声介韵与声介母,附加待输入的数 序单韵母,组成数序的声介韵与声介韵,所对应的数序目标双音词中,选取一组或多组实用频 度较高的双音词,在数码行指定并且提示一组或多组数序的声介韵与声介韵简码双音词,下次 击键使用次字单韵母的任一数码,直接输入其简码双音词而结束该进程,称作单声介韵与单声 介母编码附加数序单韵母的数序简码词输入模式;即声介韵与声介母编码附加数序单韵母的 数序简码词输入模式,仅使用单声母。 声介韵与声介韵双音词,即不区分声调的双音词,是现 有技术最常用词编码方法,不再进一步说明。  If the number has not been input before, enter the second word single mother, so as to input the sound and the sound, and add the sequenced single vowel to be input, and form the sequence of the sound and the rhyme, the corresponding number In the two-tone word of the sequence target, one or more sets of two-syllable words with higher practical frequency are selected, and one or more sets of sequenced sounds and sounds are used in the digital line, The next keystroke uses any digit of the second-character single-final, directly enters its short-coded double-syllable and ends the process, which is called the monophonic and mono-media coding. Input mode; that is, the sound sequence and the sound mediator code add the number of single-final single-sequence short code word input mode, using only a single initial. The two-syllable word of sound and rhyme, that is, the two-syllable word that does not distinguish the tone, is the most commonly used word coding method in the prior art, and will not be further explained.
如果此前并未输入数码,则进一步地,使用字符单韵母任一字符,输入声介韵与声介韵,采 用所述的双声介韵编码附加序号的数序简码词字输入模式,再使用任一数码输入所提示的双 音词、 或其任一单字而结束该进程;或者省略该进程,仅采用上一步骤输入双音词。  If the digital number has not been input before, further, using any character of the character single vowel, inputting the sound and rhyme, and using the double-tone vocoding to encode the sequence number of the short-coded word-word input mode, and then using End the process by either the two-note word suggested by the digital input, or any of its words; or omit the process and only use the previous step to enter the two-syllable word.
如果限定最多输入两个字的编码,则结束该进程,到此为止的字符编码附加数序码元的数 序简码输入方法,统称为单声介母编码附加数序韵调母的数序简码字词输入方法。如果没有限 定最多输入两个字的编码,则可以进一步输入 3、 4、 5或更多个字的单声母、声介母和声介韵 的编码,并且不断地附加相应的数序韵调母的数序简码,直至使用任一数码输入简码而结束。 采用双拼的任意一种汉字编码输入法,首次击键输入声母,再次击键输入介韵母,最多击 键两次输入一个声介韵。其中普通的双拼汉字编码输入法,由于没有按照介母与韵母的行与列 的对应关系指定介韵母的码元布局,因此其数序码元也是同一列字符键所有介韵母的杂乱组 合,难以合并和简化,因此也没有优势。 只有按照介母与韵母的行与列对应关系指定介韵母的 码元布局,同一列字符键的所有介韵母才可以合并和简化。 因此,现有技术 1之外的双拼汉字 编码输入法,也要在数码行直接指定数序的单韵母。 但如果同指击键的字符键与数码键,所指 定的单韵母并不一致,则两种单韵母就会相互干扰,造成不必要的混乱,以下不再涉及。 If the encoding of the maximum input of two words is limited, the process ends, and the number encoding method of the character encoding additional number sequential symbols of the character encoding so far is collectively referred to as the order of the number of the monosyllabic coded sequence Shortcode word input method. If you do not limit the encoding of up to two words, you can further enter 3, 4, 5 or more words for the single initial, the acoustic mother and the sound. Encoding, and continually appending the corresponding sequence-sequence code of the number-sequence to the end, using any digital input shortcode. Use any Chinese character encoding input method of double spelling, input the initials by the first keystroke, input the finals by pressing the key again, and input a sound medium twice by pressing the key twice. Among them, the ordinary double-spelling Chinese character encoding input method, because the symbol layout of the vowel is not specified according to the correspondence between the row and the column of the vowel and the final, the number-sequence symbol is also a messy combination of all the vowels of the same column of character keys. It is difficult to merge and simplify, so there is no advantage. Only the symbol layout of the vowels can be specified according to the row-column correspondence between the mother and the vowel. All the vowels of the same column of characters can be merged and simplified. Therefore, in the double-spelling Chinese character encoding input method other than the prior art 1, the single-final of the numerical order is also directly specified in the digital line. However, if the character keys of the same type of keystrokes are different from the numeric keys, and the single vowels specified are not identical, the two single vowels will interfere with each other, causing unnecessary confusion, which is not involved below.
采用双拼的任意一种汉字编码输入法,首次击键输入声母,再次击键输入介韵母,最多击 键两次输入一个声介韵,并且把每一列字符键所指定的、 单韵母相同的介韵母合并为单韵母, 再指定在同指击键的数码键上,即为技术方案 7,其具体实施方式如下所述:  Use any Chinese character encoding input method of double spelling, input the initials by the first keystroke, input the finals by pressing the key again, input a sound medium twice by pressing the maximum key, and assign the same single prime to each character key. The vowels are merged into a single vowel and then assigned to the digital key of the same fingerstroke key, which is the technical solution 7. The specific implementation is as follows:
现有技术 1有很多双拼码元布局、 尤其是介韵母布局的实施例,以下不再重复说明,只说 明本发明进一步优选的几个双拼码元布局实施例。  The prior art 1 has many embodiments of double-stitched symbol layouts, especially melodic layouts. The following description will not be repeated, and only a few preferred dual-composition symbol layout embodiments of the present invention will be described.
图 3-10列出了几种字母键盘的汉语音母符号的码元布局实施例,使用字形相同的英文字 母表示单声母,直接指定双声母的键位;或者替换为圆括号之内的双声母,以便于交互地输入 汉语与英文。 如果使用南方音方式,即 211与2、 sh与 s、 ch与 c分别合并,则双声母分别移 至首字符相同的 z、 s、 c的键位上。 每个字符键的底行是汉语音母符号的介母与单韵母组合 的介韵母。标注在数码键顶行的单韵母和声调,就是每个同指击键的介韵母所合并的数序单韵 母,以及直接指定的数序单声调,可组合为数序韵调母。 数序单声调也可以替换为图 24-27中 相同指法的数序双声调。 Figure 3-10 shows the symbol layout example of the Chinese alphabet symbol of several alphabetic keyboards. The English alphabet with the same glyph is used to indicate the monophone, and the key of the double consonant is directly specified; or the double is replaced by the parentheses. Initials, so that you can input Chinese and English interactively. If the southern sound mode is used, that is, 211 and 2 , sh and s, ch and c are respectively combined, the double initials are respectively moved to the same z, s, c key positions of the first character. The bottom line of each character key is the mediation of the combination of the mediation of the Chinese mother symbol and the single final. The single vowels and tones marked on the top line of the digital key are the single-sequence single vowels combined with the prime vowels of the same keystrokes, and the directly specified numerical order single tones, which can be combined into a numerical order. The digital single tone can also be replaced by the digital double tone of the same fingering in Figure 24-27.
图 3和图 4是基于 "QWERTY"键盘的汉语音母的码元布局,指定在每一列字符键的 "介母 与单韵母"组合码元,也指定在同指击键的数码键上,其数码码元的介母可以省略,即不区分 介母而简化为单韵母。 因此斜列指法图 3的数序韵调母简化为 la, 2ang, 3e, 4 ~ er, 5 ' an, 6 v en, 7、 eng, 8au, 9eu, Oei, -ai,或者把数序单声调替换为图 24或 26的数序双声调;其正列 指法图 4的数序韵调母简化为 2a, 3ang, 4e, 5 ~ er, 6 ' an, 7 v en, 8、 eng, 9au, Oeu, - ei, +ai, 或者把数序单声调替换为图 25或 27的数序双声调。 Figure 3 and Figure 4 are the symbol layout of the Chinese vowel based on the "QWERTY" keyboard. The combination of the "mother and single vowel" symbols in each column of character keys is also specified on the digital keys of the same fingerstroke. The mediator of the digital symbol can be omitted, that is, it is simplified to a single final with no distinction between the mediators. Therefore, the numerical order rhyme of Figure 3 is simplified to la, 2ang, 3e, 4 ~ er, 5 ' an, 6 v en, 7, eng, 8au, 9eu, Oei, -ai, or the order The tone is replaced by the sequenced double tone of Figure 24 or 26; its positive fingering is reduced to 2a, 3ang, 4e, 5 ~ er, 6 ' an, 7 v en, 8, eng, 9au , Oeu, - ei, +ai, or replace the sequence-single tone with the sequence-order double tone of Figure 25 or 27.
图 5和图 6是现有技术 1的汉语音母符号的码元布局实施例,本发明称作 " ,,键盘。 与图 3和图 4完全适应 "QWERTY"键盘的字符布局有所不同,图 5和图 6为了适应单韵母的 实用频度而调整了部分字符的布局。斜列指法图 5的数序韵调母依次为 la, 2ang, 3eng, 4 - er, 5 ' an, 6 ^ en, 7 e, 8au, 9eu, Oei, -ai,或把数序单声调替换为图 24或 26的数序双声调;正列 指法图 6的数序韵调母依次为 2a, 3ang, 4eng, 5 ~ er, 6 ' an, 7 v en, 8、 e, 9au, Oeu,— ei, -ai, 或把数序单声调替换为图 25或 27的数序双声调。 5 and FIG. 6 are diagrams of a symbol layout of a Chinese vowel symbol of the prior art 1, which is referred to as ",, keyboard. The character layout of the "QWERTY" keyboard is completely different from that of FIGS. 3 and 4, Figure 5 and Figure 6 adjust the layout of some characters in order to adapt to the practical frequency of the single finals. The oblique sequence fingering of Figure 5 is in the order of la, 2ang, 3eng, 4 - er, 5 ' an, 6 ^ En, 7 e, 8au, 9eu, Oei, -ai, or replace the sequence single tone with the sequence double tones of Figure 24 or 26; the positive fingering of Figure 6 is the order of 2a, 3ang, 4eng , 5 ~ er, 6 ' an, 7 v en, 8, e, 9au, Oeu, - ei, -ai, or replace the sequence-single tone with the sequence-order double tone of Figure 25 or 27.
图 7、 图 9的斜列指法数序韵调母与图 5的完全一致,图 8、 图 10的正列指法数序韵调母 与图 6的完全一致,只是图 7-图 10的字符及其单声母的码元布局有所不同。 图 7-10的字符 布局是根据汉语音母符号的单声母之间的组合规律重新设计的,充分地考虑了汉语信息的特 殊性,是使用汉语音母符号的最佳字符布局的字母键盘,可称作汉语键盘。  Figure 7 and Figure 9 are the same as the Figure 5 and Figure 10. The positive sequence of the positive sequence of Figure 8 and Figure 10 is exactly the same as that of Figure 6, but the characters of Figure 7-10. The symbol layout of its monophonic mother is different. The character layout of Figure 7-10 is redesigned according to the combination rule of the single initials of the Chinese initial symbol, fully considering the particularity of Chinese information, and is the alphabetic keyboard of the best character layout using the Chinese initial symbol. Can be called a Chinese keyboard.
依据图 2汉语音母符号、 汉语拼音符号和注音符号的介母与单韵母及其介韵母组合符号 的相互对应关系,可以把图 3-10中所标注的汉语音母符号的 "介母与单韵母"组合符号,分 别替换为汉语拼音符号或注音符号的介韵母符号,其中汉语拼音符号的某些介韵母符号由于 有所变异或简化,较难拆分出介母与单韵母,例如介韵母 "ong "的介母与单韵母为 "u"和 "eng " ,而介韵母 " ing " 的介母与单韵母为 " i "和 "eng "。 必须指出,汉语拼音的两个符 号" uo和 o ",其汉语音母符号已经合并为一个介韵母符号 "ue",因为只有这样才可以与 "Ue» 合并为一个介韵母符号 "ue" ,以便一个键位只标注一个介韵母符号。 According to the mutual correspondence between the Chinese mother symbol, the Chinese phonetic symbol and the phonetic symbol of Fig. 2, the combination of the mediation and the single vowel and the vowel symbol, the Chinese mother symbol marked in Figure 3-10 can be used. The single vowel "combination symbol is replaced by the Chinese pinyin symbol or the phonetic symbol of the phonetic symbol, and some of the symbols of the Chinese phonetic symbol are mutated or simplified, and it is difficult to separate the mother and the single vowel. The mother and single vowels of the vowel "ong" are "u" and "eng", while the mother and single vowels of the vowel "ing" are "i" and " eng ". It must be pointed out that the two characters of Chinese Pinyin The number "uo and o", its Chinese initial symbol has been merged into a vowel symbol "ue", because only in this way can be combined with "Ue» as a vowel symbol "ue" so that only one key can be labeled. Vowel symbol.
之所以首先设计汉语音母符号的码元布局,再转换为汉语拼音符号或注音符号的码元布 局,其原因就在于要实现一个键位只标注一个介韵母符号的目的,以便于字母键盘与其使用触 摸屏虚拟的字母键盘,其双拼的码元布局保持一致,从而解决使用触摸屏虚拟的字母键盘,与 字母键盘的码元布局不一致的难题。使用汉语拼音符号或注音符号,由于其符号自身的缺陷不 能解决这个难题,尤其是汉语拼音符号: " en"和 " eng "有时简化为 "η"和 "ng ",而 " uo 和 0 "两个近似的发音却使用两个不同的符号,又使用 ong表示 " "、 使用 " iong "表示 " U L ",都是导致介韵母符号不能相互合并的原因,尤其是单韵母相同、 u和 U开头的介韵母, 不能通过省略 U上的两点而合并。 注音符号这方面的问题虽然少一些,但因为其符号的非字母 特性,应用范围也因此受到严格的限制,难以国际化。 把汉语拼音符号稍加改进即可得到汉语 音母符号,克服了上述的缺陷,尤其是单韵母相同、 u和 U开头的介韵母,可以通过省略 U上的两 点而合并,从而每个字符键只需要标注一个介韵母符号。 因此,以汉语音母符号为基础设计汉 语表音符号的双拼码元布局,可以达到最佳的设计效果,又可以在介韵母的组合符号层次上, 与汉语拼音和注音符号完全兼容。  The reason why the symbol layout of the Chinese vowel symbol is first designed and then converted into the symbol layout of the Chinese pinyin symbol or the phonetic symbol is that the purpose of implementing a key is to mark only one vowel symbol, so that the alphabet keyboard and its Using the virtual alphabet keyboard of the touch screen, the layout of the double-stitched symbols is consistent, thereby solving the problem that the virtual alphabet keyboard of the touch screen is inconsistent with the symbol layout of the alphabet keyboard. The use of Chinese phonetic symbols or phonetic symbols cannot solve this problem because of the defects of the symbols themselves, especially the Chinese Pinyin symbols: "en" and "eng" are sometimes simplified to "η" and "ng", while "uo and 0" The approximate pronunciation uses two different symbols, and the use of ong for "" and "iong" for "UL" are the reasons why the vowel symbols cannot be merged with each other, especially the single vowels are the same, u and U begin. The vowel may not be merged by omitting the two points on U. Although the problem of phonetic symbols is less, the scope of application is strictly limited due to the non-letter nature of the symbols, making it difficult to internationalize. By slightly improving the Chinese Pinyin symbol, you can get the Chinese phonetic symbol, which overcomes the above shortcomings, especially the single finals, the initials of u and U, which can be merged by omitting the two points on U, so that each character The key only needs to be marked with a vowel symbol. Therefore, based on the Chinese phonetic symbols, the double-composition symbol layout of the Chinese phonetic symbols can be designed to achieve the best design effect, and it can be fully compatible with the Chinese pinyin and phonetic symbols at the level of the combination of the finals.
使用所述字母键盘的任意一个字符布局及其汉语音母、 汉语拼音或注音符号的双拼码元 布局及其数序单韵母。例如,图 3斜列指法的数序单韵母为: la, 2ang, 3e, 4er, 5an, 6en, 7eng, 8au, 9eu, Oei,— ai;图 4正列指法的数序单韵母为: 2a, 3ang, 4e, 5er, 6an, 7en, 8eng, 9au, Oeu, - ei,+ai ;而图 5、 7、 9的斜列指法的数序单韵母为: la, 2ang, 3eng, 4er, 5an, 6en, 7e, 8au, 9eu,0ei,- ai ;图 6、 8、 10正列指法的数序单韵母为: 2a, 3ang, 4eng, 5er, 6an, 7en, 8e, 9au, Oeu, -ei, +ai。 采用下述的任意一种汉字编码输入方法输入汉字词语:  Use any character layout of the alphabetic keyboard and its double-symbol layout of Chinese, Chinese, or phonetic symbols and its sequence-single vowel. For example, the numerical order single vowel of the oblique indexing of Figure 3 is: la, 2ang, 3e, 4er, 5an, 6en, 7eng, 8au, 9eu, Oei, - ai; Figure 4 is the numerical order single vowel of the positive fingering: 2a , 3ang, 4e, 5er, 6an, 7en, 8eng, 9au, Oeu, - ei, +ai ; and the numbered single vowels of the oblique indexing of Figures 5, 7, and 9 are: la, 2ang, 3eng, 4er, 5an , 6en, 7e, 8au, 9eu, 0ei,- ai ; The numerical order single vowels of the positive indexing of Figures 6, 8, and 10 are: 2a, 3ang, 4eng, 5er, 6an, 7en, 8e, 9au, Oeu, -ei , +ai. Enter Chinese characters using any of the following Chinese character encoding input methods:
输入 1个编码字符之后,所输入的编码字符视为声母,依次与数序韵调母的每个单韵母组 合为数序的不区分介母的声介韵,依次选取数序的不区分介母的声介韵目标字符集中,实用频 度较高的单字或单字词,指定为每个数码的单韵母所对应的数序声韵简码字。 例如图 3,首次 击键输入声母 g,与其数序韵调母 la, 2ang, 3e, 4 ~ er, 5 ' an, 6 v en, 7、 eng, 8au, 9eu, Oei, - ai 分别组合,所组合的不区分介母的数序声介韵为: lga, 2gang, 3ge, 5gan, 6gen, 7geng, 8gau, 9geU, 0gei, -gai。 选择每个数码的不区分介母的声介韵所对应的目标汉字中,实用频度较高 的单字或单字词作为其一级数序简码。 After inputting one code character, the input code character is regarded as the initial, and each single vowel that is sequentially combined with the number of the vowels is a sequence-independent phonological tone, and the sequence-independent mediation is sequentially selected. The target character set in the sound medium, the single word or single word with higher practical frequency, is specified as the number sequence sound rhyme short code word corresponding to the single final of each digital. For example, in Figure 3, the first keystroke input initials g, and its numbered rhyme, la, 2ang, 3e, 4 ~ er, 5 ' an, 6 v en, 7, eng, 8au, 9eu, Oei, - ai are respectively combined, The combined sequence acoustics of the combined mediators are: lga, 2gang, 3ge, 5gan, 6gen, 7geng, 8gau, 9 geU , 0 g ei, - ga i. In the target Chinese characters corresponding to the sounds of the mediators of each digit, the single-character or single-word with higher practical frequency is selected as the first-order digital shortcode.
图 21为图 4的汉语音母码元布局的一级数序简码即数序声韵简码字实施例,数码 1所在 行是常规一级简码,补加空格或数码 1而输入。首先输入声母,再输入其所在行的数码,击键两 次即可输入每个声韵简码字。 把图 21的每个数码分别下移一行,即为图 3的一级数序简码即 数序声韵简码字实施例,但数码 1所在行的常规一级简码只能补加空格而输入,不能再补加数 码 1 ;如果把图 21第 4行的单韵母 " e "与第 8行的单韵母 " eng "及其同一行的声韵简码字 互换键位,可作为图 6、 8、 10的一级数序简码即数序声韵简码字实施例;进一步地再把每个 数码分别下移一行,即为图 5、7和 9的一级数序简码即数序声韵简码字实施例,但数码 1所在 行的常规一级简码也只能补加空格而输入。  21 is a first-order digital short code of the Chinese initial symbol layout of FIG. 4, that is, a digital sequence vocoded short code word embodiment, where the digit 1 is a conventional first-level short code, and is added with a space or a digital 1 input. First enter the initials, then enter the number of the line in which it is located, and press the key twice to enter each of the abbreviations. Each digit of FIG. 21 is shifted down by one line, which is an embodiment of the first-order digital short code of FIG. 3, that is, the digital sequential sounding simple code word, but the conventional first-level short code of the line of the digital 1 can only add spaces. Input, can not add the number 1; if the single vowel "e" in the 4th line of Figure 21 and the single vowel "eng" in the 8th line and the vowels of the same line of the same line, can be used as Figure 6 8, 8, 10 first-order digital short code, that is, the numerical sequence sound rhyme short code word embodiment; further, each digit is further shifted down one line, that is, the first-order digital short code of FIG. 5, 7 and 9 is the number The sequence of the sound rhyme is a simple code word embodiment, but the regular first level short code of the line of the digital 1 can only be input by adding a space.
如果此前并未输入数码,则输入第 2个编码字符,如果是有效的声介韵,则附加数序韵调母 的数序单声调,例如图 3、 5、 7、 9斜列指法的数序单声调均为 4 _, 5 6 7、,而图 4、 6、 8、 10正列指法的数序单声调均为 5 _, 6 7 v, 8、。 所输入的每个声介韵依次与数序的单 声调符号组合为汉语音节,选择每个音节中实用频度较高的单字或单字词作为其音节简码字, 如斜列指法图 22的标调音节及其音节简码字实施例,方括号内的数字即为其单字词的实用频 度数据,也可以替换为单字的实用频度数据;进一步地把其它实用频度降序的单字或单字词, 依次指定在 9、 4、 0、 3、 2和 1的数码键上,例如图 22未标调的音节及其音节简码字实施例。 If the number has not been entered before, enter the second coded character. If it is a valid tone, add the number order tone of the numbered tone, such as the number of the oblique fingerings in Figure 3, 5, 7, and 9. The single tone of the sequence is 4 _, 5 6 7 , and the sequence of the 4, 6, 8, 10 positive index single tone is 5 _, 6 7 v , 8,. Each of the input phonological rhymes is sequentially combined with the single-tone symbol of the sequence to be a Chinese syllable, and a single word or a single word with a higher practical frequency in each syllable is selected as its syllable short code word, such as the oblique fingering method 22 The syllables of the syllables and their syllable short codewords, the numbers in square brackets are the practical frequencies of their single words. The degree data can also be replaced with the utility frequency data of the single word; further, the other words or single words in descending order of the practical frequency are sequentially designated on the numeric keys of 9, 4, 0, 3, 2 and 1, for example, 22 unvoiced syllables and their syllable short codeword embodiments.
或者依据此前击键的手指与待输入数码的手指之间击键效率的降序,依次指定其实用频 度降序的单字或单字词。 图 22的实施例中,介韵母 "α "在键盘上的位置,在图 3-10中均为 "Tab"键的右侧即使用左小指击键,因此与待输入数码的手指之间击键效率的降序,调整为 数码 9、 0、 4、 3、 2、 1,则图 22的数码 0和 4的声韵简码字应该互换位置,因为左右手交替 击键输入效率最高。 如果使用正列指法,图 22除数码外均右移一位。 指定在声调符号数码的 声韵简码字,声调才是固定的,其它数序声韵简码字的声调并不固定,目的是把每个声介韵中 实用频度较高的汉字均指定在第一页的数序简码中,无需翻页即可找到,以便提高输入效率。  Or, according to the descending order of the keystroke efficiency between the finger of the previous keystroke and the finger of the digit to be input, the word or single word in descending order of the practical frequency is sequentially designated. In the embodiment of Fig. 22, the position of the prime vowel "α" on the keyboard, in the right side of the "Tab" key in Fig. 3-10, the left little finger slamming key is used, so that the finger is pressed with the finger to be input. The descending order of the key efficiency is adjusted to the numbers 9, 0, 4, 3, 2, and 1, and the vowels of the numbers 0 and 4 of Fig. 22 should be interchanged because the left and right hands alternately have the highest input efficiency. If the positive fingering is used, Figure 22 is shifted to the right by one digit except the digit. The tone is only fixed in the syllable code word of the tone symbol number. The tone of other code sequence syllabic words is not fixed. The purpose is to specify the Chinese characters with higher practical frequency in each voice. One-page digital short code can be found without turning pages to improve input efficiency.
或者,把数序韵调母的数序单声调,替换为图 24-27的相同指法的数序双声调。 正列指法 的图 28和图 29,分别是依据图 25的数序双声调,指定音节简码字和音节符号的实施例。 图 28右手击键的数码,以及图 29左手击键的数码,分别使用其声调指定并且提示数序音节简码 字,其中数码 6和 7分别指定为零声调,把声介韵 "ba"中实用频度最高的单字词 "吧"指定 为声韵简码字。 图 28左手击键的数码,以及图 29右手击键的数码,分别使用其声调指定并且 提示数序音节符号。 图 28、 29中,除数码外的所有标记均左移一个键位,即为其斜列指法的 相应实施例。 下次击键使用双声调的任一数码,输入任一音节简码字或音节符号;或进一步地 提示所输入音节符号的一组或多组,每组最多 12个实用频度较高的同音字,下下次击键使用 任一数码输入所对应的同音字。  Alternatively, replace the sequence-single tone of the numbered tone to the numbered double tone of the same fingering of Figure 24-27. Figures 28 and 29 of the positive fingering are embodiments of the syllable short code words and syllable symbols, respectively, in accordance with the sequenced double tones of Fig. 25. Figure 28 shows the number of the right-hand keystroke, and the number of the left-hand keystroke of Figure 29, respectively, using its tone designation and prompting the numbered syllable short codeword, where the numbers 6 and 7 respectively specify a zero tone, and the sound is in the "ba" The single word "bar" with the highest frequency of practicality is designated as the syllabic code word. Figure 28 shows the number of the left-hand keystroke, and the number of the right-hand keystroke of Figure 29, using their tone assignments and prompting the sequenced syllables. In Figures 28 and 29, all marks except the digits are shifted left by one key, which is the corresponding embodiment of the oblique indexing. The next keystroke uses any number of double tones, enters any syllable short code word or syllable symbol; or further prompts one or more groups of input syllable symbols, each group of up to 12 homophones with higher practical frequency Word, next time the keystroke uses the homophone corresponding to any digital input.
如果此前并未输入数码,则输入第 3个编码字符,如果是有效的声介韵与声母,则附加数 序单韵母。 所输入的声介韵与声母,依次与每个数码的单韵母组合为一组或多组,也就是不同 页的数序简码,可以使用翻页键例如 "-"和 "=" 的上档字符 "_"和 "+" 向前或向后翻页。 每组按数序依次提示最多 12个待输入双字的声介韵与声韵中、 实用频度较高的双字词,必须 注意! 此前只输入了第 2字的声母,所附加的数序单韵母也没有包含介母,所以第 2字的声韵 组合没有区分介母,不但包括无介母的声韵,也包括该声韵中分别添加介母 i、介母 u和介母 U 的所有声介韵,实际是按单韵母分类的未区分介母的声介韵,而不是通常意义的不含介母的声 韵。因此,声介韵与声韵,严格地说,应该是首字的声介韵、次字按单韵母分类的未区分介母的 所有声介韵,否则就不能覆盖全部的介韵母,实用频度较高的双字词就可能有所遗漏。 与诗歌 的押韵规则相一致,单韵母相符即可。  If the number has not been entered before, enter the third coded character. If it is a valid tone and initial, add the sequence single final. The input sound and the initial, which are combined with the single vowel of each digit in turn, are grouped into one or more groups, that is, the numbered short codes of different pages, and the page turning keys such as "-" and "=" can be used. The characters "_" and "+" turn pages forward or backward. Each group promptly prompts up to 12 pairs of double-words to be input, and the double-words with higher frequency of practicality, must pay attention! Previously, only the initials of the second word were input, and the numbered single vowels added did not contain the mother. Therefore, the combination of the second word has no distinction between the mother and the mother, including not only the sound of the mother, but also the sound. All the phonological rhymes of the mediator i, the mediator u and the mediator U are actually the phonological melody of the undifferentiated mediator classified by the single vowel, rather than the phonology of the usual meaning without the mother. Therefore, the sound and rhyme of the sound, strictly speaking, should be the sound of the first word, the sub-word according to the single vowel classification of the undifferentiated mediation of all the sounds, otherwise it can not cover all the vowels, the practical frequency Higher double words may be missing. Consistent with the rhyming rules of poetry, a single vowel can match.
例如,使用图 3的双拼码元布局,输入 3个字符 gc j之后,所输入的为有效的声介韵与声母 "guoj " ,附加数序单韵母 la, 2ang, 3e, 4er, 5an, 6en, 7eng, 8au, 9eu, Oei,— ai,其数序的声介 韵与声韵依次为= lguoja, 2guojang, 3guoje, 4guojer, 5guojan, 6guojen, 7guojeng, 8guojau, 9guojeu, Oguojei, -guoja i,其首字的声介韵与次字按单韵母分类的所有声介韵的有效组合 依次为 lguojia, 2guojiang, 3guojie、 guojue, 4guoji、 guoju, 5guojian、 guojuan, 6guojien、 guojuen, 7guojieng guojueng, 8guojiau, 9guojieu0 因此其数序简码可以依次指定为 = 1国 家, 2果酱, 3过节, 4国际, 5国检, 6国君, 7国境, 8果胶, 9果酒。都是实用频度很高的双字词, 而且使用每个词第 2字单韵母的数码键即可直接输入,只需记住哪些双字词是该编码的数序 简码,无需记住每个双字词与数码的对应关系,从而减轻简码双字词的记忆负担。 For example, using the double-composition symbol layout of FIG. 3, after inputting 3 characters gc j , the input is a valid arpeggio and initial "guoj", and the numbered single-final la, 2ang, 3e, 4er, 5an, 6en, 7eng, 8au, 9eu, Oei, — ai, the order and the rhyme and rhyme of the order are = lguoja, 2guojang, 3guoje, 4guojer, 5guojan, 6guojen, 7guojeng, 8guojau, 9guojeu, Oguojei, -guoja i, The effective combination of the first syllable and the second syllables according to the single vowel is lguojia, 2guojiang, 3guojie, guojue, 4guoji, guoju, 5guojian, guojuan, 6guojien, guojuen, 7guojieng guojueng, 8guojiau, 9guojieu 0 Therefore, its sequence short code can be designated as = 1 country, 2 jam, 3 festivals, 4 international, 5 national inspection, 6 national king, 7 national borders, 8 pectin, 9 fruit wine. They are all double-words with high practical frequency, and you can directly input them by using the numeric keys of the second single vowel of each word. Just remember which double words are the short-coded short codes of the code, no need to remember The correspondence between each double word and the number, thus reducing the memory burden of the short code double word.
如果所输入的是两个字无效的声介韵与声母,则视为 3个字的声母的依次组合,补加空格 输入依据 3个字的声母声母声母所确定的三字词,即传统三字词的 "声声声"词编码;例如利 用图 3的双拼码元布局,输入 "rmw",前两个字符是无效的声介韵组合,因此视为 3字词,使 用 "声声声"三字词编码法只有 "南泥湾"而直接输入。或附加末字的数序单韵母,组合为一 组或多组的 "声声声韵",每组按数序依次提示最多 12个、 待输入 3字的 "声母声母声韵" 组合中,实用频度较高的三字词,使用第 3字单韵母的数码键直接输入。 比较适合有很多三字 词重码的词汇量很大的实施例,以下不再详细说明。 If the input is an invalid tone and initials of two words, it is regarded as the sequential combination of the initials of the three words, and the space is added to input the three words determined by the initials of the initials of the three characters, that is, the traditional three The word "sound" is encoded; for example, using the double-composition symbol layout of Figure 3, enter "rmw", the first two characters are invalid combinations of sounds, so they are treated as 3 words, using "sound" The "three-word code" method is only entered directly by "Nan Niwan". Or add a sequence of single finals of the last word, combined into one Group or groups of "sounds and sounds", each group in order of number prompts up to 12, to be input 3 words of "consonant initials" combination, three words with higher practical frequency, using the third word list The digital key of the final is directly input. It is more suitable for an embodiment with a large vocabulary with many three-word re-codes, which will not be described in detail below.
如果此前并未输入数码,则输入第 4个编码字符,如果是有效的声介韵与声介韵,视为词字 序列,例如利用图 5的双拼音母码元布局,输入字符编码 " li jj "即声介韵与声介韵 " lijie", 对应的双字词主要是:理解、礼节、历届,其词字序列的实用频度降序为:理解 1196、理 2200、 解 4349、 (合计) 7745,礼节 22、礼 888、节 4411、 (合计) 5321,历届 18、历 598、届 975、 (合 计) 1591,斜列指法依次指定在数码键 "6、 7、 8, 3、 4、 5, 9、 0、 -,,上,其斜列指法的数序词 字简码依次为: 3礼节、 4礼、 5节, 6理解、 7理、 8解, 9历届、 0历、 -届;正列指法则依次 指定在数码键 "7、 8、 9, 4、 5、 6, 1、 2、 3"上,其正列指法的数序词字简码依次为: 1历届、 2历、 3届, 4礼节、 5礼、 6节, 7理解、 8理、 9解。  If the number has not been input before, enter the 4th coded character. If it is a valid sound and rhyme, it is regarded as a sequence of words. For example, using the double pinyin symbol layout of Figure 5, enter the character code "li" Jj "The sound of the rhyme and the sound of the rhyme" lijie", the corresponding double-words are mainly: understanding, etiquette, past, the descending order of the practical frequency of the word sequence is: understanding 1196, theory 2200, solution 4349, (total 7745, etiquette 22, ceremony 888, section 4411, (total) 5321, previous 18, calendar 598, 975, (total) 1591, the oblique fingering method is specified in the numeric keys "6, 7, 8, 3, 4, 5, 9, 0, -,, on, the sequence code word short code of the oblique column fingering is: 3 etiquette, 4 ritual, 5 verses, 6 understanding, 7 physics, 8 solutions, 9 epochs, 0 calendars, - The order of the positive index is specified in the numeric keys "7, 8, 9, 4, 5, 6, 1, 2, 3", and the sequence of the positive-sentence fingers is in order: 1 successive, 2 Calendar, 3 sessions, 4 etiquette, 5 rituals, 6 verses, 7 understandings, 8 physics, 9 solutions.
或者,首先确定数序简码输入之前所输入的字符,再按照左右手交替击键优先、 食指和中 指优先于无名指和小指、 同手的手指连续击键最后的原则,依次指定实用频度降序的词字序 列。上述数序简码输入之前所输入的字符为" j ",是右手击键,则词字序列的频度降序更改为: 左食指与左中指、左无名指与左小指、右食指与右中指、或右无名指与右小指的顺序,其斜列 指法的数序词字简码依次变更为: 3理解、 4理、 5解, 6礼节、 7礼、 8节, 9历届、 0历、 -届;其正列指法的数序词字简码依次变更为: 1礼节、 2礼、 3节, 4理解、 5理、 6解, 7历届、 8历、 9届。  Or, first determine the characters entered before the digital sequence short code input, and then according to the left and right hand alternate keystroke priority, the index finger and the middle finger take precedence over the last finger and the little finger, the same finger continuous keystrokes, and then specify the practical frequency descending order. Word sequence. The character input before the above-mentioned sequence short code input is "j", which is the right-hand keystroke, and the frequency descending order of the word sequence is changed to: left index finger and left middle finger, left ring finger and left little finger, right index finger and right middle finger, Or the order of the right ring finger and the right little finger, the sequence code word short code of the oblique index fingering is changed to: 3 understanding, 4 theory, 5 solution, 6 etiquette, 7 ceremony, 8 festivals, 9 calendars, 0 calendars, - session The sequence code of the positive fingering is changed to: 1 etiquette, 2 ritual, 3 verses, 4 understanding, 5 physics, 6 solutions, 7 epochs, 8 calendars, 9 sessions.
多组的双字词及其两个单字的词字序列,虽然也属于重码,但只需要记住 3个双字词的键 位及其排序: 因为双字词的位置是固定的,斜列指法总是 3、 6、 9,正列指法总是 1、 4、 7,而 单字的位置总是在其双字词之后无需单独记忆,因此可快速地输入每个双字词或其所包含的 任一单字,并且其记忆难度很小。  Multiple sets of double-words and their two-word sequence of words, although they are also heavy codes, only need to remember the keys of three double-words and their ordering: because the position of the double-word is fixed, the oblique column The fingering is always 3, 6, 9, and the positive fingering is always 1, 4, 7, and the position of the word is always stored after its double word, so you can quickly enter each double word or it contains Any word, and its memory is very difficult.
数序简码扩大了双拼输入法的编码空间,尤其是词的编码空间。常用双字词仍是 4键输入: 不区分双字词尾字的介母,可以覆盖所有实用频度最高的几千个双字词,常用双字词的输入效 率并没有降低。再使用双声介韵编码附加序号的数序简码词字输入模式, 5键输入双字词或其 任一单字,仅占用常规双字词及其重码的编码空间,重码词再多也没有关系,最多可以支持几 十万个汉语词汇,足以覆盖所有的汉语双字词及其所包含的单字。  The numerical sequence short code expands the coding space of the double spell input method, especially the word coding space. Commonly used double words are still 4-key input: The mediator that does not distinguish the double-word endings can cover all the thousands of double-words with the highest frequency of practical use. The input efficiency of commonly used double words is not reduced. Then use the double-sound rhyme code to encode the number-sequence short-coded word-word input mode, and the 5-key input double-word or any single word, which only occupies the coding space of the regular double-word and its heavy code, and the re-coded word has no relationship. It can support hundreds of thousands of Chinese words, enough to cover all Chinese double words and the words they contain.
工业实用性 Industrial applicability
本发明作为一种数序码元键盘及其信息输入方法,可以方便地进行汉字的编码输入。本发 明依据字母键盘的斜列或正列指法,把每一列字符键所指定的字符或码元,也指定在同指击键 的数码键上组成数码码元,再分别按数序排列组成数序码元;和 /或依据数码的输入效率和数 码专用码元的实用频度,在数码行直接指定数码专用的数序码元;把数码视为非首键编码字符 作为所输入编码的附加编码,从而以编码方法指定简码,依据与简码的编码对应关系使用数码 提示并且可以直接输入更多的简码;使用本发明的数序码元键盘及其信息的编码和输入方法, 编制并且运行相应的汉字编码输入处理软件程序即可实施本发明,具有良好的工业实用性。  The invention as a digital sequence symbol keyboard and an information input method thereof can conveniently perform coding input of Chinese characters. According to the oblique column or the positive column fingering of the alphabet keyboard, the character or symbol specified by each column of character keys is also designated on the digital key of the same fingerstroke key to form a digital symbol, and then the number of components is respectively arranged in numerical order. Sequence symbols; and/or directly assign digital-specific digital sequential symbols to the digital line according to the digital input efficiency and the practical frequency of the digital dedicated symbols; the digital is regarded as a non-first key encoded character as an addition to the input code Encoding, thereby specifying a short code by an encoding method, using a digital prompt according to the encoding correspondence with the short code and directly inputting more short codes; using the numerical sequence symbol keyboard of the present invention and the encoding and input method thereof, And the invention can be implemented by running the corresponding Chinese character code input processing software program, and has good industrial applicability.

Claims

权 利 要 求 书 Claim
1、 一种数序码元键盘及其信息输入方法,目标字符为汉字的读音音节符号、 单字、 词、 词组或语句,或汉字与各种字符的任意组合; 1. A digital sequential symbol keyboard and an information input method thereof, wherein the target character is a syllable syllable symbol, a single word, a word, a phrase or a sentence of a Chinese character, or any combination of a Chinese character and various characters;
对所要输入的目标字符集进行编码,所用的编码信息单元称作码元,指定在任意一个字母 键盘或虚拟字母键盘的字符键上称作码元布局,参与编码的字符键所标注的字符称作编码字 符,所有编码字符的键位组成字符键区;数码行的字符 1、 2、 3 0、 "」,和 "="统称为 数码,其排序称作数序;通过码元的关联作用建立编码字符-目标字符映射库即码表;  Encoding the target character set to be input, the coding information unit used is called a symbol, and is designated as a symbol layout on the character key of any alphabet keyboard or virtual alphabet keyboard, and the character name marked by the character key participating in the encoding As a coded character, the keys of all coded characters constitute the character keypad; the characters of the digital line 1, 2, 3 0, "", and "=" are collectively referred to as numbers, and the ordering is called number order; through the association of symbols Establish a coded character-target character mapping library, that is, a code table;
统计所有目标字符集的实用频度,计算各种码元布局总的时间当量数据进行比较;如果一 个码元指定在字形或读音相同或相近的编码字符上,对于总的输入效率的影响可以忽略则优 先指定,否则就要变更或修饰这个码元的符号,或变更这个编码字符的位置;最终选择出输入 效率较高并且好学易记的码元布局;  The practical frequency of all target character sets is counted, and the total time equivalent data of various symbol layouts is calculated for comparison; if one symbol is specified on the same or similar coded characters of glyph or pronunciation, the influence on the total input efficiency can be ignored. Then specify the priority, otherwise it is necessary to change or modify the symbol of the symbol, or change the position of the coded character; finally select the symbol layout with high input efficiency and easy to learn and remember;
具体的汉字词语或其读音音节符号的编码输入过程,是相同或不同的输入模式下,前后接 续的多个进程所组成,每个进程包括下列步骤:  The encoding input process of specific Chinese words or their pronunciation syllables is composed of multiple processes in the same or different input modes, and each process includes the following steps:
接收用户通过所用键盘输入的编码字符信息,提示所输入的字符、 码元或候选目标字符; 根据所输入编码字符,从编码字符-目标字符映射库即码表中查找出相应的目标字符集; 将所述目标字符集显示在显示器上,和 /或把目标字符的读音通过语音输出的设备播放; 其特征如下所述:  Receiving coded character information input by the user through the keyboard used, prompting the input character, symbol or candidate target character; according to the input coded character, searching for the corresponding target character set from the coded character-target character mapping library, that is, the code table; Displaying the target character set on the display, and/or playing the pronunciation of the target character through a device for voice output; the characteristics are as follows:
依据所述键盘手指击键的斜列或正列指法,每一列字符键所指定的字符或码元,也指定在 同指击键的数码键上;每个数码键所指定的字符或码元称作数码码元,依次按数序排列组成数 序码元;和 /或依据数码输入效率和数码专用码元的实用频度,在数码行直接指定数码专用的 数序码元;从数序码元中分离出来,专门用于指定简码的、 数序码元的子集,也简称数序码元; 指定至少一种数序码元的所述键盘称作数序码元键盘,包括斜列和正列两种指法的数序 码元键盘;从而在输入第一个编码字符之后,使数码成为非首键且仅在编码末尾处才有效的编 码字符,代表数序码元按数序依次参与编码,作为此前所输入编码的附加编码而指定简码; 在字符键区每输入一个编码字符,所输入的字符编码,附加待输入的数序码元,组成字符 编码附加数序码元的数序编码,所对应的数序目标字符集中,选取实用频度较高的一组或多 组、 每组最多 12个数序目标字符,在数码行指定并且提示所输入字符编码的一组或多组、 每 组最多 12个按数序排列的简码,称作数序简码,该过程称作依据所输入编码附加数序码元而 指定数序简码;采用下述的字符编码附加数序码元的数序简码输入方法:  According to the oblique column or the positive column fingering of the keyboard fingerstroke, the character or symbol specified by each column of character keys is also specified on the digital key of the same fingerstroke key; the character or symbol specified by each digit key The digital symbol is sequentially arranged in a numerical order to form a sequence of symbols; and/or the digital dedicated digital sequence symbol is directly specified in the digital line according to the digital input efficiency and the practical frequency of the digital dedicated symbol; Separated from the symbol, specifically for specifying a short code, a subset of the sequence of symbols, also referred to as a sequence of symbols; the keyboard specifying at least one number of symbols is referred to as a numbered symbol keyboard, including The numbered symbol keyboard of the two fingerings of the oblique column and the positive column; thus, after inputting the first coded character, the coded character that makes the digital non-first key and only valid at the end of the code represents the order of the numbered symbols. Participate in the code in turn, specify the short code as the additional code of the previously input code; input one code character in the character keypad, input the character code, add the sequence code symbol to be input, and form the character code additional sequence code symbol Number Coding, corresponding to the sequence of the target character set, select one or more groups with higher practical frequency, up to 12 number of target characters per group, specify one or more groups of the input character codes in the digital line Each group of up to 12 short codes arranged in numerical order, called a sequence short code, the process is called specifying a sequence short code according to the input code additional number sequence symbol; using the following character encoding additional number order Number sequence short code input method of symbol:
在字符键区输入首个编码字符,所输入的首字符编码附加待输入的数序码元,组成首字符 编码附加数序码元的数序编码,所对应的数序目标字符集中,选取实用频度较高的一组或多 组、每组最多 12个数序目标字符,在数码行指定并且提示首字符的一组或多组数序简码,称作 一级数序简码,下次击键使用待输入数序码元的任一数码,直接输入其简码而结束该进程,否 则输入下一个编码字符;  Entering the first coded character in the character keypad, the first character code input is added to the number sequence symbol to be input, and the number sequence code of the first character code additional sequence code symbol is formed, and the corresponding number order target character set is selected, and the utility is selected. One or more groups of higher frequency, each group of up to 12 number of sequence target characters, one or more sets of sequence short codes specified in the digital line and prompting the first character, called first-order digital short code, under The second keystroke uses any number of digits to be input, directly enters its short code to end the process, otherwise enters the next coded character;
在字符键区输入第 2个编码字符之后,所输入双字符编码附加待输入的数序码元,组成双 字符编码附加数序码元的数序编码,所对应的数序目标字符集中,选取实用频度较高的一组或 多组、 每组最多 12个数序目标字符,在数码行指定并且提示双字符编码的一组或多组数序简 码,称作二级数序简码,下次击键使用待输入数序码元的任一数码,直接输入其简码而结束该 进程,否则输入下一个编码字符;  After the second coded character is input in the character keypad, the input two-character code is added to the number sequence symbol to be input, and the number sequence code of the two-character coded additional number sequence symbol is formed, and the corresponding digital sequence target character set is selected. One or more groups of higher frequency of practicality, up to 12 number of sequence target characters per group, one or more sets of sequence short codes specified in the digital line and prompting two-character encoding, called second order short code The next keystroke uses any number of digits to be input, directly enters its shortcode and ends the process, otherwise enters the next encoded character;
依次类推,在字符键区输入第 N个编码字符之后, N为逐个递增的正整数,所输入的 N个字 符的编码附加待输入的数序码元,组成 N个字符编码附加数序码元的数序编码,所对应的数序 目标字符集中,选取实用频度较高的一组或多组、每组最多 12个数序目标字符,在数码行指定 并且提示 N个字符编码的一组或多组数序简码,称作 N级数序简码,下次击键使用待输入数序 码元的任一数码,直接输入其简码而结束该进程,否则输入下一个编码字符;直至达到最大输 入码长,或输入标点、 空格等非编码字符或回车而结束该进程; And so on, after inputting the Nth coded character in the character keypad, N is a positive integer that is incremented one by one, and the input N words The code of the character is added to the sequence code symbol to be input, and the number sequence code of the N character code additional sequence code symbol is composed, and the corresponding number of sequence target character sets are selected, and one or more groups with a higher practical frequency are selected. A group of up to 12 number of sequence target characters, one or more sets of sequence short codes specified in the digital line and prompted by N characters, called N-order number sequence short codes, and the next keystrokes to use the number sequence symbols to be input Any of the numbers, directly enter the short code to end the process, otherwise enter the next coded character; until the maximum input code length is reached, or enter non-coded characters such as punctuation, spaces, or carriage return to end the process;
或者进一步地,所输入字符编码不能附加数序码元的重码,依据此前击键的手指与待输入 数码的手指、 组合击键效率的降序,依次指定其实用频度降序的重码。  Or further, the input character code cannot add the weight code of the sequence code symbol, and the weight code of the descending order of the practical frequency is sequentially designated according to the descending order of the finger of the previous keystroke and the finger to be input digital and the combination keystroke efficiency.
2、 按照权利要求 1所述的数序码元键盘及其信息输入方法,使用任意一种形码汉字编码 输入法,其特征是,依据所输入编码附加数序码元而指定数序简码,简化为在每一列待输入字 符的高一级别现有简码中选择简码,按数序组成本级别的数序简码,如下所述:  2. The digital sequence symbol keyboard and the information input method thereof according to claim 1, wherein any one of the shape code Chinese character encoding input methods is used, wherein the number order short code is specified according to the input code added sequence number symbol. Simplified to select a short code in the existing short code of the higher level of each column to be input characters, and form the sequence short code of the level in numerical order, as follows:
输入任意一个编码字符之后,选择每一列待输入字符的二级简码之一,指定为每个同指击 键数码的简码,按数序组成一级数序简码;  After inputting any one of the coded characters, one of the two-level short codes of each character to be input is selected, and the short code of each of the same fingerstroke numbers is designated, and the first-order digital short code is composed in numerical order;
输入任意 2个编码字符之后,选择每一列待输入字符的三级简码之一,指定为每个同指击 键数码的简码,按数序组成二级数序简码;  After inputting any two coded characters, one of the three-level short codes of each character to be input is selected, and each short code of the same fingerstroke number is designated, and the second-order short code is composed by number order;
依次类推,输入任意 N个编码字符之后, N为逐个递增的正整数,选择每一列待输入字符的 N+1级简码之一,指定为每个同指击键数码的简码,按数序组成 N级数序简码,直至达到所设定 的最大输入码长为止。  By analogy, after inputting any N coded characters, N is a positive integer incrementing one by one, and selecting one of the N+1 level short codes of each character to be input, designating each short code of the same fingerstroke key, by number The sequence forms an N-order number shortcode until the set maximum input code length is reached.
3、 按照权利要求 1或 2所述的数序码元键盘及其信息输入方法,变更 "五笔字型" "86 版"的简体、 或 "98版"的简体或繁体的字根码元布局,其特征如下所述:  3. The number sequence symbol keyboard according to claim 1 or 2 and the information input method thereof, and the simplified or traditional root symbol layout of the "five-character type" "86 version" simplified or "98 version" is changed. , its characteristics are as follows:
靠近左侧的 10列字符键划分为列数对等的左区和右区,每个区内,字根的首笔画相同的字 根码元、指定在同一列的字符键上,字根的次笔画相同的字根码元、指定在同一行的字符键上, 称作列笔画字根码元布局,包括斜列和正列指法的列笔画字根码元布局;同一列字符键的字根 码元也指定在同指击键的数码键上,组成斜列或正列指法的数序字根码元,或进一步地简化为 字根的首笔画和次笔画组成的数序笔画码元;除字根码元的布局,及新增的数序字根码元和数 序笔画码元外,保留 "五笔字型"原有的简体或繁体的字词编码输入方法,也可补加空格输入 原有简码,如果采用正列指法还可进一步地补加数码 1而输入原有简码;  The 10-column character keys on the left side are divided into the left and right areas of the number of columns, and in each area, the first stroke of the root is the same as the character of the same column, and the root of the character is specified. The same root symbol of the second stroke, specified on the character key of the same line, is called the column stroke root symbol layout, including the column stroke root symbol layout of the oblique column and the positive column fingering; the root of the same column character key The symbol element is also specified on the digital key of the same fingerstroke key, and constitutes the number sequence root symbol of the oblique column or the positive column fingering, or is further reduced to the number sequence stroke symbol composed of the first stroke and the second stroke of the radical; In addition to the layout of the root symbol, and the newly added numbered root symbol and numbered stroke symbol, the original "five-stroke type" original simplified or traditional word encoding input method is retained, and spaces can also be added. Input the original short code, if using the positive index fingering, you can further add the number 1 and input the original short code;
每输入一个编码字符,所输入的字符编码,附加待输入的数序字根码元、或数序笔画码元, 所对应的数序目标汉字中,选取实用频度较高的一组或多组、每组最多 12个数序的目标汉字, 在数码行指定并提示 1、 2、 3、 4或 5字符编码的一组或多组数序简码字;下次击键使用待输 入数序字根码元或数序笔画码元的任一数码,直接输入其简码字而结束该进程;否则,输入下 一个编码字符;直至达到最大输入码长,或输入标点、空格等非编码字符或回车而结束该进程。  Each time a coded character is input, the input character code is added, the number of the sequence word root symbol to be input, or the number of sequenced stroke symbols is added, and the corresponding number of target target Chinese characters is selected, or a group with a higher practical frequency is selected. Group, up to 12 target Chinese characters in each group, specify one or more sets of numbered short code words encoded in 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 characters in the digital line; use the number to be entered in the next keystroke Any digit of the radical root symbol or the digital sequential stroke symbol, directly inputting its short codeword to end the process; otherwise, input the next encoded character; until the maximum input code length is reached, or input non-coding such as punctuation, space, etc. End the process with a character or a carriage return.
4、 按照权利要求 1所述的数序码元键盘及其信息输入方法,使用全拼、 简拼或双拼的任 意一种汉字编码输入方法,其特征如下所述:  4. The digital sequence symbol keyboard and the information input method thereof according to claim 1, wherein any one of the Chinese character encoding input methods of full spelling, simple spelling or double spelling is used, and the characteristics are as follows:
阴平、 阳平、 上声和去声的声调符号,针对斜列指法依次指定在 4、 5、 6、 7的数码键上, 或针对正列指法依次指定在 5、 6、 7、 8的数码键上,统称为数序单声调;  Yinping, Yangping, Shangsheng and Detachment tones, which are assigned to the numeric keys of 4, 5, 6, or 7 for the oblique column fingering, or the numeric keys of 5, 6, 7, and 8 for the positive column fingering. Above, collectively referred to as a single-order single tone;
或者去声、 阴平、 阳平和上声的声调符号,分别指定在食指、 中指、 无名指和小指依次击 键的、 左手和右手两组数码键上;或进一步地把所有声调合并为零声调,分别指定在输入效率 较高的、 左手和右手的两个数码键上;指定零声调与否的两种双声调,统称为数序双声调; 依据汉字词语的读音,采用下述的任意一种字符编码附加数序码元的数序简码输入方法: 输入任一声介韵编码之后,附加待输入的数序单声调,组成数序的声介韵调,所对应的数 序目标汉字中,选取实用频度较高的一组或多组,每组最多 6个单字或单字词,分别指定在数 序单声调的数码键上;并且选取相同声介韵的、 实用频度较高的其它单字或单字词,指定在其 它数码键上;在数码行指定并且提示一组或多组数序的音节简码字,下次击键使用数序单声调 的任一数码、 直接输入其音节简码字,或使用其它任一数码、 输入所提示的音节简码字,从而 结束该进程,称作声介韵编码附加数序单声调的数序简码字输入模式; Or the tone symbols of the sound, the Yinping, the Yangping and the upper sound are respectively designated on the left, right and right hand digital keys of the index finger, the middle finger, the ring finger and the little finger; or further all the tones are combined into zero tones, respectively Specified on two digital keys with high input efficiency, left-hand and right-hand; two double tones that specify zero tonality or not, collectively referred to as digital-sequence dual-tone; according to the pronunciation of Chinese words, any one of the following character codes is used. The method of inputting the sequence number short code of the additional number sequence symbol: After inputting any sound medium coding, the number sequence tones to be input are added, and the sound sequence of the sequence is composed, and the corresponding numerical order target Chinese characters are selected. One or more groups with a high frequency, each group of up to 6 words or words, respectively specified in the number On the digital key of the single tone; and select other words or words with the same frequency and higher practical frequency, which are specified on other digital keys; specify and prompt one or more sets of numbers in the digital line. Syllable short code word, the next keystroke uses any number of single-order single tone, directly input its syllable short code word, or use any other digital, input the syllabic short code word prompted, thus ending the process, called Acoustic prime code encoding additional sequence-single-tone digital sequence short code word input mode;
或者,输入任一声介韵编码之后,附加待输入的数序双声调,组成两组数序的声介韵调;一 组数序声调指定并且提示所述的数序音节简码字,另一组数序声调指定并且提示数序的音节 符号;下次击键使用数序双声调的任一数码,直接输入其音节简码字或音节符号而结束该进程; 或进一步地提示所输入音节符号的一组或多组、 每组最多 12个实用频度较高的同音字,再一 次击键使用任一数码、输入所提示的同音字再结束该进程,统称为声介韵编码附加数序双声调 的数序简码音字输入模式;  Alternatively, after inputting any of the phonological codes, the sequenced double tones to be input are added to form two sets of sequenced audio tones; a set of sequenced tones specifies and prompts the sequenced syllables, and the other The group number tone specifies and prompts the syllable symbol of the sequence; the next keystroke uses any number of the sequenced double tone, directly inputs its syllable short code word or syllable symbol to end the process; or further prompts the input syllable symbol One or more groups, each group of up to 12 homophonic words with higher practical frequency. Once again, use any number and input the homophones prompted to end the process. Double-tone digital sequence short code input mode;
如果限定最多输入一个字的编码,则结束该进程,到此为止的字符编码附加数序码元的数 序简码输入方法,统称为字符编码附加数序声调的数序简码音字输入方法;  If the encoding of the maximum input of one word is limited, the process ends, and the number encoding short code input method of the character encoding additional number sequential symbol is used, which is collectively referred to as the numerical code short-order short-coded short-coded short-word input method;
或进一步地,输入任意两个声介韵编码之后,所输入的双声介韵视为双音词,无论是否重 码,每个双音词及其首字、尾字依次组成词字序列;依据此前击键的手指与待输入数码的手指、 组合击键效率的降序,在数码行依次指定一组或多组、 总的实用频度降序的词字序列;使用所 提示的数码输入任一双音词、或其任一单字而结束该进程,称作双声介韵编码附加序号的数序 简码词字输入模式;  Or further, after inputting any two sounds and rhymes, the input double-syllables are regarded as two-syllable words, and whether or not they are re-coded, each double-syllable word and its first and last words form a sequence of word words; The keystroke finger and the finger to be input digital, the descending order of the combined keystroke efficiency, in the digital line, sequentially specify one or more groups, the total practical frequency descending word sequence; use the prompted digital input any two-syllable word Ending the process, or any of its words, is called a double-speech coded additional sequence number-simplified codeword word input mode;
如果限定最多输入两个字的编码,则结束该进程,到此为止的字符编码附加数序码元的数 序简码输入方法,统称为字符编码附加数序声调的数序简码字词输入方法。  If the encoding of the maximum input of two words is limited, the process ends, and the character encoding short-coded short code input method of the character encoding additional number-sequence symbol up to this point is collectively referred to as the character-coded short-coded short word input of the character encoding additional sequenced tone. method.
5、 按照权利要求 1所述的数序码元键盘及其信息输入方法,其特征是,依据数码输入效率 和单韵母实用频度,在数码行直接指定数序单韵母,或进一步地在基准键行或其上一行的、 同 指击键字符键上也指定单韵母称作字符单韵母;或者进一步地指定所述的数序单声调或双声 调而组成数序韵调母;采用下述的任意一种字符编码附加数序码元的数序简码输入方法:  5. The digital sequence symbol keyboard according to claim 1 and an information input method thereof, wherein, according to the digital input efficiency and the single-female practical frequency, the digital sequence line directly specifies the numbered single vowel, or further in the reference. The key line or the line above the same finger key character also specifies a single final is called a character single final; or further specifies the numerical order single tone or double tone to form a sequence rhyme; Any number of character encoding additional sequence number symbols of the number order short code input method:
首次击键输入首字单声母, 211与2、 sh与 s、 ch与 c分别合并,或另行指定双声母的键位 而首次击键输入,否则击键两次输入首字双声母; The first key input enters the first word single initial, 2 11 and 2 , sh and s, ch and c respectively, or separately specify the double initial key and the first key input, otherwise the key input twice input the first double initial;
所输入的单声母或双声母的编码,附加待输入的数序单韵母,组成首字的数序声韵,每个 声韵及其声韵中包含 i、 u和 U的所有声介韵,所对应的数序目标汉字中,选取一组或多组、 每 组最多 12个实用频度较高的单字或单字词,在数码行指定并且提示一组或多组的、 数序的声 韵简码字,下次击键使用数序单韵母的任一数码,直接输入其声韵简码字而结束该进程,称作 声母编码附加数序单韵母的数序简码字输入模式;  The input of the single initial or double initial, the additional sequenced single vowel to be input, constitutes the first order of the sequence of rhymes, each of the rhymes and their rhymes contain all the sounds of i, u and U, corresponding to In the numerical order target Chinese character, select one or more groups, each group of up to 12 single words or single words with higher practical frequency, specify and prompt one or more sets of sequenced sound rhyming code words in the digital line. The next keystroke uses any number of the single-sequence single-final, directly inputting its vocoded short-coded word and ends the process, which is called the initial-coded short-coded single-final single-coded short codeword input mode;
否则,进一步地输入首字介母,从而最多击键三次输入首字声介母;附加待输入的数序单 韵母,组成首字的数序声介韵,所对应的数序目标汉字中,选取一组或多组、 每组最多 12个实 用频度较高的单字或单字词,在数码行指定并且提示一组或多组的、 数序的声介韵简码字,下 次击键使用单韵母的任一数码,直接输入其声介韵简码字而结束该进程,称作声介母编码附加 数序单韵母的数序简码字输入模式;  Otherwise, the first word mother is further input, so that the first word initial is input by a maximum of three keystrokes; the numbered single vowel to be input is added, and the number sequence sound of the first word is composed, and the corresponding numerical order target Chinese character is Select one or more groups, each group of up to 12 single words or single words with higher practical frequency, specify and prompt one or more sets of sequenced sounds in the digital line, the next hit The key uses any number of single vowels and directly inputs its vocal code to end the process, which is called the sound-coded mother-coded sequence-single-single-single-single-simplified code-word input mode;
或进一步地,使用字符单韵母的任一字符,输入首字的声介韵;采用所述的声介韵编码附 加数序单声调的数序简码字输入模式,直接输入任一音节简码字而结束该进程;或采用所述的 声介韵编码附加数序双声调的数序简码音字输入模式,直接输入任一音节简码字或音节符号 而结束该进程;或进一步地输入所输入音节符号的任一同音字,再结束该进程;  Or further, using any character of the single vowel of the character, inputting the phonological rhyme of the first word; using the vocal grammar coding to add a sequence of single-tone single-coded short code word input mode, directly input any syllable short code Terminating the process by using the word; or using the augmented rhyme coding additional number-sequence double-tone sequence-sequential short code word input mode, directly inputting any syllable short code word or syllable symbol to end the process; or further inputting Enter any homophone of the syllable symbol and end the process;
如果限定最多输入一个字的编码,则结束该进程,到此为止的字符编码附加数序码元的数 序简码输入方法,统称为声母编码附加数序韵调母的数序简码音字输入方法; 或进一步地,输入次字单声母或双声母,所输入的声介韵与声母编码,附加待输入的数序 单韵母,组成数序的声介韵与声韵,每个声介韵与声韵、 及其声韵中包含1、 u和 U的所有声介 韵与声介韵,所对应的数序目标双音词中,选取一组或多组、每组最多 12个实用频度较高的双 音词,在数码行指定并且提示一组或多组的、 数序的声介韵与声韵简码双音词,下次击键使用 次字单韵母的任一数码,直接输入其简码双音词而结束该进程,称作声介韵与声母编码附加数 序单韵母的数序简码词输入模式; If the encoding of the maximum input of one word is limited, the process ends, and the number encoding short code input method of the character encoding additional number sequential symbol is used, which is collectively referred to as the initial sequence of the initials. method; Or further, input a single word initial or double initial, the input sound and the initial code, add the sequenced single vowel to be input, form the sequence of the sound and rhyme, each sound and rhyme, And its rhyme contains all the sounds and sounds of 1, u and U, corresponding to the number of target two-syllable words, select one or more groups, each group of up to 12 pairs with higher practical frequency The syllables are specified in the digital line and suggest one or more sets of sequenced sounds and vowels. The next time you use the key of the second vowel, you can directly enter the short code. Ending the process with a syllable, called the phonological and initial consonant coded sequenced single vowel, the numbered short code word input mode;
否则,输入次字介母,从而输入声介韵与声介母,附加待输入的数序单韵母,组成数序的声 介韵与声介韵,所对应的数序目标双音词中,选取一组或多组实用频度较高的双音词,在数码 行指定并且提示一组或多组的、数序的声介韵与声介韵简码双音词,下次击键使用次字单韵母 的任一数码,直接输入其简码双音词而结束该进程,称作声介韵与声介母编码附加数序单韵母 的数序简码词输入模式;  Otherwise, input the second word mother, so as to input the sound and rhyme, and add the sequenced single vowel to be input, and form the sequence of the sound and the rhyme, corresponding to the sequence of the target two-syllable words, Select one or more sets of two-syllable words with higher frequency of practice, and specify and prompt one or more sets of sounds and sounds of the sequence and the two-syllable words in the digital line. The next keystroke is used. Any number of single-single vowels, directly inputting its short-coded double-syllables and ending the process, called the sound-synchronized and the syllabic code-added sequence-single-single-single-order syllabic word input mode;
或者进一步地, 使用字符单韵母的任一字符,输入声介韵与声介韵,采用所述的双声介韵 编码附加序号的数序简码词字输入模式,再使用任一数码输入所提示的双音词、或其任一单字 而结束该进程;  Or further, using any character of the single vowel of the character, inputting the sound and rhyme, and using the double-voiced rhyme coding to add the serial number of the short-coded word-word input mode, and then using any digital input to prompt The two-syllable word, or any of its words, ends the process;
如果限定最多输入两个字的编码,则结束该进程,到此为止的字符编码附加数序码元的数 序简码输入方法,统称为声母编码附加数序韵调母的数序简码字词输入方法。  If the encoding of the maximum input of two words is limited, the process ends, and the number encoding short code input method of the character encoding additional number sequential symbol is used, which is collectively referred to as the initial coded short code word of the initials. Word input method.
6、 按照权利要求 1所述的数序码元键盘及其信息输入方法,其特征是,一律使用 V代替 "hu",双声母组合输入;依据数码输入效率和单韵母实用频度,在数码行直接指定数序单韵 母,或进一步地在基准键行或其上一行的、 同指击键字符键上也指定单韵母称作字符单韵母; 或者进一步地指定数序单声调或双声调而组成数序韵调母;采用下述的任意一种字符编码附 加数序码元的数序简码输入方法:  6. The digital sequence symbol keyboard according to claim 1 and an information input method thereof, wherein V is used instead of "hu", and the dual initial combination input; according to the digital input efficiency and the single vowel practical frequency, in the digital The line directly specifies the sequence single vowel, or further specifies the single vowel as the character single vowel on the same keystroke line or the same finger line character key; or further specifies the number order single tone or double tone The composition of the sequence rhyme adjustment; using any of the following character encoding additional numerical sequence code number short code input method:
首次击键输入首字单声母,附加待输入的数序单韵母,组成首字的数序声韵,每个声韵及 其声韵中包含 i、 u、 U、 h和 hu或 v的所有声介韵,所对应的数序目标汉字中,选取一组或多 组、 每组最多 12个实用频度较高的单字或单字词,在数码行指定并且提示一组或多组的、 数 序的声韵简码字,下次击键使用数序单韵母的任一数码,直接输入其声韵简码字而结束该进程, 称作单声母编码附加数序单韵母的数序简码字输入模式;  The first keystroke enters the first word single initial, and the numbered single vowel to be input is added to form the first-order numerical sequence rhyme. Each sound and its rhyme contains all the sounds of i, u, U, h and hu or v. Among the corresponding numerical target Chinese characters, one or more groups, each group of up to 12 single words or single words with higher practical frequency, are specified in the digital line and suggest one or more groups, numerical order Acoustic rhyme short code word, the next keystroke uses any number of the single-sequence single-final, directly input its rhyme short-character word and end the process, called the mono-acoustic coding additional number-single-single-single-sequence short-coded word input mode;
否则,进一步地输入首字单介母,从而最多击键两次输入首字的声介母;附加待输入的数 序单韵母,组成首字的数序声介韵,所对应的数序目标汉字中,选取一组或多组、 每组最多 12 个实用频度较高的单字或单字词,在数码行指定并且提示一组或多组的、数序的声介韵简码字, 下次击键使用单韵母的任一数码,直接输入其声介韵简码字而结束该进程,称作单声介母编码 附加数序单韵母的数序简码字输入模式;  Otherwise, the first word single mediator is further input, so that the voice initials of the first word are input twice at most; the numbered single vowels to be input are added, and the number sequence sound of the first word is composed, and the corresponding numerical order target In Chinese characters, select one or more groups, each group of up to 12 single words or single words with higher practical frequency, and specify and prompt one or more sets of sequenced sound simplification code words in the digital line. The next keystroke uses any number of single vowels, directly inputting its syllabic short codeword and ending the process, which is called the monophonic coded additional sequenced single vowel.
或者进一步地, 使用字符单韵母的任一字符,输入首字的声介韵;采用所述的声介韵编码 附加数序单声调的数序简码字输入模式,直接输入任一音节简码字而结束该进程;或采用所述 的声介韵编码附加数序双声调的数序简码音字输入模式,直接输入任一音节简码字或音节符 号而结束该进程;或进一步地输入所输入音节符号的任一同音字,再结束该进程;  Or further, using any character of the single vowel of the character, inputting the phonological rhyme of the first word; using the vocal grammar coding to add the number-single-single-single-sequential short code word input mode, directly input any syllable short code Terminating the process by using the word; or using the augmented rhyme coding additional number-sequence double-tone sequence-sequential short code word input mode, directly inputting any syllable short code word or syllable symbol to end the process; or further inputting Enter any homophone of the syllable symbol and end the process;
如果限定最多输入一个字的编码,则结束该进程,到此为止的字符编码附加数序码元的数 序简码输入方法,统称为单声介母编码附加数序韵调母的数序简码音字输入方法;  If the encoding of the maximum input of one word is limited, the process ends, and the number encoding short code input method of the character encoding additional number sequential symbol is used, which is collectively referred to as the number sequence of the monogram-prefixed numbered sequence. Code word input method;
或进一步地输入次字单声母,所输入的声介韵与声母编码,附加待输入的数序单韵母,组 成数序的声介韵与声韵,每个声介韵与声韵、 及其声韵中包含^ u、 U、 h和 hu或 v的所有 声介韵与声介韵,所对应的数序目标双音词中,选取一组或多组、每组最多 12个实用频度较高 的双音词,在数码行指定并且提示一组或多组的、 数序的声介韵与声韵简码双音词,下次击键 使用次字单韵母的任一数码,直接输入其简码双音词而结束该进程,称作单声介韵与单声母编 码附加数序单韵母的数序简码词输入模式; Or further input the sub-word initials, the input sound and the initial code, add the sequence-single vowel to be input, form the sequence of the sound and rhyme, each sound and rhyme, and its rhyme Including all the sounds and sounds of ^ u, U, h and hu or v, corresponding to the sequenced target two-syllable words, one or more groups are selected, and each group has a maximum of 12 practical frequencies. Two-syllable words, specified in the digital line and prompting one or more sets of, the sequence of the sound and the rhyme short coded two-syllable words, the next keystroke Using any digit of the second-character single-final, directly inputting its short-coded double-syllables and ending the process, which is called the monophonic mero-symbol and the mono-acoustic encoding, the number-sequence-single-single-single-single-simplified-word input mode;
否则,输入次字单介母,从而输入声介韵与声介母,附加待输入的数序单韵母,组成数序的 声介韵与声介韵,所对应的数序目标双音词中,选取一组或多组、每组最多 12个实用频度较高 的双音词,在数码行指定并且提示一组或多组的、 数序的声介韵与声介韵简码双音词,下次击 键使用次字单韵母的任一数码,直接输入其简码双音词而结束该进程,称作单声介韵与单声介 母编码附加数序单韵母的数序简码词输入模式;  Otherwise, input the sub-word single mediator, so as to input the sound and rhyme, and add the sequence-single vowel to be input, and form the sequence of the sound and the rhyme, corresponding to the sequence of the target two-syllable words. Select one or more groups, each group of up to 12 two-syllable words with higher practical frequency, specify and prompt one or more groups of digital sounds and sounds in the digital line. Word, the next keystroke uses any digit of the second-character single-final, directly enters its short-coded double-syllable and ends the process, which is called the monophonic and mono-media coding. Codeword input mode;
或者进一步地, 使用字符单韵母任一字符,输入声介韵与声介韵,采用所述的双声介韵编 码附加序号的数序简码词字输入模式,再使用任一数码输入所提示的双音词、或其任一单字而 结束该进程;  Or further, using any character of the character single vowel, inputting the sound and rhyme, and using the double-tone vowel coding to add the sequence number of the short code word input mode, and then using any digital input to prompt End the process with a two-syllable word, or any of its words;
如果限定最多输入两个字的编码,则结束该进程,到此为止的字符编码附加数序码元的数 序简码输入方法,统称为单声介母编码附加数序韵调母的数序简码字词输入方法。  If the encoding of the maximum input of two words is limited, the process ends, and the number encoding method of the character encoding additional number sequential symbols of the character encoding so far is collectively referred to as the order of the number of the monosyllabic coded sequence Shortcode word input method.
7、 按照权利要求 1所述的数序码元键盘及其信息输入方法,单声母指定在同字形的字母 键上,其特征是,原则上,介母相同的介韵母指定在同一行字符键上,单韵母相同的介韵母指 定在同一列字符键上,个别介韵母可以例外;单独做韵母的介母 i、 u和 U统称为零韵母,分别 指定在单韵母 er的同列字符键上; 2}!与2、 811与8、 ch与 c分别合并,或另行指定双声母键 位;每一列字符键所指定的介韵母,合并为不区分介母的单韵母,分别指定在同指击键的数码 键上组成数序单韵母,或者进一步地指定所述的数序单声调或双声调而组成数序韵调母;采用 下述的任意一种字符编码附加数序码元的数序简码输入方法: 7. The number sequence symbol keyboard according to claim 1 and an information input method thereof, wherein a single initial is assigned to a letter key of the same font, and is characterized in that, in principle, the same vowel of the same mother is assigned to the same line of character keys. On the same, the single vowels of the same single vowel are assigned to the same column of character keys, and the individual vowels can be exceptional; the mesons of the vowels alone, i, u and U are collectively referred to as zero vowels, which are respectively assigned to the same character keys of the single final er ; 2 }! and 2 , 811 and 8 , ch and c are respectively combined, or separately specify the double initial key; the memorized prime specified by each column of character keys is merged into a single final with no mediation, respectively specified in the same fingering The numeric key of the key constitutes a sequence single vowel, or further specifies the numerical order single tone or double tone to form a numerical sequence vowel; the sequence of the additional numbered symbols is encoded by any of the following characters Shortcode input method:
首次击键输入首字的单或双声母,釆用所述的声母编码附加数序单韵母的数序简码字输 入模式,直接输入任一声韵简码字而结束该进程;  The first keystroke inputs the single or double initials of the first word, and uses the initial code of the initial coded single-final single-coded short code word input mode, and directly inputs any of the abbreviated short code words to end the process;
否则,再次击键输入首字的介韵母,采用所述的声介韵编码附加数序单声调的数序简码字 输入模式,直接输入任一音节简码字而结束该进程;或采用所述的声介韵编码附加数序双声调 的数序简码音字输入模式,直接输入任一音节简码字或音节符号而结束该进程;或进一步地输 入所输入音节符号的任一同音字再结束该进程;  Otherwise, press the key again to input the prime vowel of the first word, use the sound phonological code to add the number-single-single-sequence number-simplified short code word input mode, directly input any syllable short code word to end the process; The phonological coding code is a sequence-simplified syllabic input mode that adds a sequence of two-tones, directly inputting any syllable short code word or syllable symbol to end the process; or further inputting any homophone of the input syllable symbol and ending The process;
如果限定最大输入码长为 2,则结束该进程,到此为止的字符编码附加数序码元的数序简 码输入方法,统称为双拼编码附加数序韵调母的数序简码音字输入方法;  If the maximum input code length is limited to 2, the process ends, and the character encoding additional number sequence code input method of the character code added thereto is collectively referred to as a double-splicing code-added number-sequence-to-speech code sequence-simplified code word Input method
或进一步地,单次击键输入次字单或双声母,采用所述的声介韵与声母编码附加数序单韵 母的数序简码词输入模式,直接输入任一简码双音词而结束该进程;  Or further, inputting a single word or a double initial with a single keystroke, and directly inputting any short coded double word by using the sound sequence and the initial encoding of the numbered single finals of the initials. End the process;
否则,单次击键输入次字的介韵母,采用所述的双声介韵编码附加序号的数序简码词字输 入模式,输入所提示的任一简码双音词、 或其任一单字而结束该进程;  Otherwise, a single keystroke enters the prime vowel of the second word, and uses the double-tone vocoding to encode the numbered short code word input mode of the additional number, and inputs any short coded double word, or any of its words. End the process;
或者进一步地,如果所输入的第 1、 2个编码字符,和 /或第 3、 4个编码字符,都不是有效 的声介韵,则视为多音词,依次使用每个字的声母或补加末字的介韵母编码输入;  Or further, if the input 1st, 2nd coded characters, and/or the 3rd and 4th coded characters are not valid sounds, they are regarded as multi-syllables, and the initials of each word are used in turn or Adding the final vowel coding input of the last word;
如果限定最大输入码长为 4,则结束该进程,到此为止的字符编码附加数序码元的数序简 码输入方法,统称为双拼编码附加数序韵调母的数序简码字词输入方法。  If the maximum input code length is limited to 4, the process ends, and the character encoding additional number sequence code input method of the character code added to the end of the process is collectively referred to as the double-splicing code-added number-sequence-to-speech number-order short code word. Word input method.
8、按照权利要求 7所述的数序码元键盘及其信息输入方法,其特征是,在 "QWERTY"键盘 上指定介韵母,基准键上一行依次为: a, ang, e, er, an, en, eng, au, eu, ei, ai;基准键一行依次 为: ia, iang, ie, i, ian, ien, ieng, iau, ieu,以及例夕卜的 uei, uai; 基准键的下一行依次为: ua, uang, ue (ue) , u, uan (iian) , uen (uen) , ueng (iieng),括号内符号可以省略; zh与 z、 811与3、 ch与 c分别合并,或者双声母 Zh、 Sh、 Ch分别指定在单声母之外的字符键上,或依 次指定在 ", "、 " . "和 "/"字符键上;或者把汉语音母符号替换为汉语拼音符号或注音符号。 8. The digital sequence symbol keyboard according to claim 7 and an information input method thereof, wherein the vowel is specified on the "QWERTY" keyboard, and the top line of the reference key is: a, ang, e, er, an , en, eng, au, eu, ei, ai; the reference key one line is: ia, iang, ie, i, ian, ien, ieng, iau, ieu, and the uei, uai; The lines are: ua, uang, ue (ue), u, uan (iian), uen (uen), ueng (iieng), the symbols in parentheses can be omitted; zh and z, 811 and 3, ch and c are respectively combined, Or the double initials Zh, Sh, and Ch are respectively designated on the character keys other than the single initial, or sequentially designated on the ", ", ".", and "/" character keys; or the Chinese initials are replaced with the Chinese phonetic symbols. Or phonetic symbols.
9、 按照权利要求 8所述的数序码元键盘及其信息输入方法,其特征是,所述的 "QWERTY" 键盘,字母 Q和 A互换键位,字母 E、 U、 I、 F、 V的键位符号依次替换为 F、 E、 V、 I、 U,称作9. The digital sequence symbol keyboard according to claim 8 and an information input method thereof, wherein said "QWERTY" keyboard, the letters Q and A are interchangeable keys, and the letters E, U, I, F, The key symbols of V are replaced by F, E, V, I, U in turn, called
"AWF"键盘;并且汉语音母码元 e和 eng, ie与 ieng, ue (ue) 与 ueng (ueng ) 分别互换键 位,或者把汉语音母符号替换为汉语拼音符号或注音符号。 "AWF" keyboard; and Chinese tone symbols e and eng, ie and ieng, ue (ue) and ueng (ueng) respectively exchange keys, or replace Chinese phonetic symbols with Chinese pinyin or phonetic symbols.
10、按照权利要求 9所述的数序码元键盘及其信息输入方法,其特征是,所述 "AWF"键盘 的字符布局,每一行由左至右依次变更为: 基准键行: 0,^ 1, ^ 2, 5,( , 1?;基准键下一 行: K, G, H, U, W, ", "及 """,字母 0, ", "及 "〈" , ". "及 ">" , "〃,及 "?" ;基准键上 一行: A, " ["及 " {", "],,及 " } ", D, T, N, E, B, M, P, F, ";"及 ":",称作 "XIY"键盘; 或者所述 "XIY"键盘,字符 Q与 K, J与 G, X与 H, B与 Z, M与 S, P与 C, F与 R分别互换键 位,称作 "HIY"键盘。  10. The number sequence symbol keyboard according to claim 9, and the information input method thereof, wherein the character layout of the "AWF" keyboard is changed from left to right in sequence: a reference key line: 0, ^ 1, ^ 2, 5, ( , 1?; The next line of the base key: K, G, H, U, W, ", " and """, the letters 0, ", " and "<", "." And ">" , "〃, and "?"; the top line of the base key: A, "[" and "{", "],, and " } ", D, T, N, E, B, M, P , F, ";" and ":", called "XIY" keyboard; or the "XIY" keyboard, characters Q and K, J and G, X and H, B and Z, M and S, P and C , F and R respectively exchange the keys, called the "HIY" keyboard.
PCT/CN2010/077121 2009-09-25 2010-09-19 Number-order-code-element keyboard and information input method thereof WO2011035705A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201080020843.8A CN102511021B (en) 2009-09-25 2010-09-19 Number-order-code-element keyboard and information input method thereof

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN200910204767.5 2009-09-25
CN200910204767 2009-09-25

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2011035705A1 true WO2011035705A1 (en) 2011-03-31

Family

ID=43795399

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2010/077121 WO2011035705A1 (en) 2009-09-25 2010-09-19 Number-order-code-element keyboard and information input method thereof

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN102511021B (en)
WO (1) WO2011035705A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN104364739A (en) * 2012-07-19 2015-02-18 梁晨 Keyboard input method based on sequence of finals

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2018133852A1 (en) * 2017-01-19 2018-07-26 梁晨 Syllable string set-based input method using initial, medial, tone, and rhyme, and employing main keyboard and numeric keypad
CN108710810B (en) * 2018-05-22 2022-03-08 中国银联股份有限公司 Password obtaining method, transaction equipment and terminal

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN1070493A (en) * 1992-07-15 1993-03-31 李一新 Phonetic form characters and words combined coding
CN1251925A (en) * 1999-11-20 2000-05-03 云惟健 Chinese-character Bisheng input method for computer and its keyboard
WO2007104262A1 (en) * 2006-03-15 2007-09-20 Chen Liang Information input method with chinese phonetic letter

Family Cites Families (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN1177270C (en) * 2000-12-20 2004-11-24 姜道友 Chinese-character digital shear model and encode technique

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN1070493A (en) * 1992-07-15 1993-03-31 李一新 Phonetic form characters and words combined coding
CN1251925A (en) * 1999-11-20 2000-05-03 云惟健 Chinese-character Bisheng input method for computer and its keyboard
WO2007104262A1 (en) * 2006-03-15 2007-09-20 Chen Liang Information input method with chinese phonetic letter

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN104364739A (en) * 2012-07-19 2015-02-18 梁晨 Keyboard input method based on sequence of finals

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN102511021B (en) 2014-05-14
CN102511021A (en) 2012-06-20

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP2006127510A (en) Multilingual input method editor for ten-key keyboard
WO2022083753A1 (en) Keyboard having novel key position layout, and input method thereof on electronic device
JPH1139078A (en) Computer input system
TW201407423A (en) Keyboard input method based on sequence of finals
WO2007104262A1 (en) Information input method with chinese phonetic letter
US20100125449A1 (en) Integratd phonetic Chinese system and inputting method thereof
WO2011035705A1 (en) Number-order-code-element keyboard and information input method thereof
CN1262473A (en) Chinese-caracter input method by phonetic letters with numeral key pad
CN100561411C (en) The input device of combining association formula input method and sound identification method and method
WO2007082488A1 (en) A information input method based on 3x4 key array
CN102422621A (en) Alphabet input method and apparatus
CN1195265C (en) Chinese language phonetic transcription simple and quick full spelling input method and its keyboare
WO2017101850A1 (en) Syllable string set keyboard input method
CN1018205B (en) Chinese voice-digit coding input technique for computer
CN1148637C (en) Precise alphabetic writing input method via common digit keyboard
WO2009146581A1 (en) Method for inputting chinese characters apapting for chinese teaching
CN100409153C (en) Partition Chinese character input method
CN100498663C (en) Method for inputting Chinese character by utilizing Korean
CN1196057C (en) One-code two-form quick Chinese digital coding input method
WO2018133852A1 (en) Syllable string set-based input method using initial, medial, tone, and rhyme, and employing main keyboard and numeric keypad
CN101419505A (en) Free code input method
TW490619B (en) Character input method
TW201229818A (en) Number sequence code element keyboard and the information input method thereof
CN107025000A (en) Phonetic transcriptions of Chinese characters input keyboard, Chinese character phonetic input system and input method of Chinese character
CN117111752A (en) New homophonic near-bit Chinese character code input method

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 201080020843.8

Country of ref document: CN

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 10818399

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

32PN Ep: public notification in the ep bulletin as address of the adressee cannot be established

Free format text: NOTING OF LOSS OF RIGHTS PURSUANT TO RULE 112(1) EPC (EPO FORM 1205A DATED 06/09/2012)

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 10818399

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1